A grammar of the Cree language, as spoken by the Cree Indians of North America

Google

This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project

to make the world's books discoverable online.

It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject

to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books

are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.

Marks, notations and other maiginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the

publisher to a library and finally to you.

Usage guidelines

Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing tliis resource, we liave taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:

+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.

+ Refrain fivm automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.

+ Maintain attributionTht GoogXt "watermark" you see on each file is essential for in forming people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.

+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liabili^ can be quite severe.

About Google Book Search

Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web

at |http: //books .google .com/I

1

A GBAMMAB

CREE LANGUAGE.

A GRAMMAR

OF THS

CREE LANGUAGE,

^ ■-' JU BPOCra BT THE

CBEB INDIANS OF NORTH AMERICA.

BT. REV. J. HORDEN, DJ).,

LONDON:

aossoT FOR psoifOTiKQ CHRiaTum Esomsmi-,

1881.

;/

THE KEV/ YORK ^

PUBLIC LIBRARY

ASTOR, LENOX AND
TILO^N FOUNOATlONd

WIMTIO av WILLIAM CMWU AMD WHS, UWniB,\A««M NMk ^aOMa

PREFACE.

Thb following Grammar was written, amidst many
intermptionfl, daring the busy ooonpations of my
Miarionaiy life* and whilst carrying on the instmo*
tion of Missionaries sent to me by the Church
Missionary Society. It has jiroved veiy ▼aliiable»
and I hare found that by its means students haire
soon acquired a good knowledge of the Cree lan-
guage, without which it would hare been quite
impossible for them to become efficient Missionaries
to a Cree-speakiDg people.

Mine is not the first Cree Grammar, one hayiog
been written many years ago by the late Jcs.
Howse, Esq., who was for a long time in the serrice
of the Honourable Hudson's Bay Company. His
compilation is a learned treatise, and deeply interest-
^V A# M pbUoIogioal Btady, but not of great prao-
atOi^^ Yfi^Ail think wmbeooiittaimilftM^

\

\

▼1 PREFACE.

principal recommendation of the prefient work is
its plainness and its numerous illustrative examples,
which will specially adapt it to the use of young
Missionaries, for whom it is principally designed ;
and it will expedite, I trust, their acquirement of
the language, and thus fit them for imparting, with
as little delay as possible, spiritual knowledge to
those committed to their care. It is hoped also that
it may be found useful to persons engaged in trade
throughout the Hudson's Bay Territories, especially
if used in connection with the valuable Cree Dic-
tionary compiled by the Bev. E. A. Watkins, the
only one yet in existence in the English and Cree
languages.

For those who may desire a fuller knowledge of
the Cree Verb than what is here given, I would
recommend Dr. Hunter's ** Lecture on the Gram-
matical Construction of the Cree Language," where
it is given in the most exhaustive manner ; but for
all practical purposes as much is contained in this
work as will be found amply sufficient.

Li the acquisition of the Cree language I would
reoommend the student, in addition to the very
diligent study of the Orammar, iou9e (he liting voice
of ihe Indian a$ muck as poiiiUe. Let him write
down, as well as he caoi^ te^Ai %aA Vdl^csw^^ss^j^ ^'^

PBEFACE. YU

everyday life from an Indian's lips, and afterwards,
with the aid of an interpreter, make interlinear
translations of them. These will form excellent
reading lessons, to be read and re-read till the con-
fused words are seen to assume their proper forms,
and many of the expressions become familiar.
Further, I would urge the learner to sit with the
natires in their tents, and note down in writing
any words he may succeed in catching while listen-
ing to their conversation, committing them after-
wards carefully to memory, and trying to make use
of the stores thus acquired. Besides this, let there
be a daily reading of the translations of the Holy
Scriptures, with a careful comparison of tiie texts
in which the same word or expression occurs. If
these suggestions are perseveringly followed, a fairly
rapid progress will undoubtedly be made.

The first portion of the Grammar will be found
comparatively easy of acquisition, especially when
the peculiarities of the tioo First Persons Plural have
been clearly understood, and the fact fully realized
that the Verb has no Infinitive Mood. The main
difficulty, which is really a serious one, will be found
in learning, so as to use readily, the different in-
flexions of the Subjunctive Mood of both the Tzan-
judr» Mod the Iniannsitive VerK

I

\

• • •

Vlll PREFACE.

Before closing, let me strongly advise the student
to use all diligence, to persevere undauntedly, and
to be content with nothing less than a complete
mastery of the language. It is true he has a diffi-
cult, a very difficult task before him; but pains,
with God*s grace, will enable him to overcome it.
His position is very different from that of his pre-
decessors a quarter of a century ago. At that time
there were very few helps indeed, as scarcely any
translations existed, and there was no Dictionary;
whereas now helps of all kinds are abundant.
Other men have laboured and he has reaped the
advantage; they have smoothed his way and re*
moved many of his difficulties. Let him be grateful
for the assistance he has received, and ako^ huta
J^itetatoifew, ako maka totpuch ka Hilemot; which
is, let him be diligent and he will soon speak
Indian. So may it prove as a comfort to himself
and a reward to me.

J. MOOSONEK

A GBAMMAB

or TUK

CREE LANGUAGE.

••o»-

OETHOGRAPHT.

Tar. Indianfi possess no written oharactexB of their
own, and their only mode of communicating with
each other^ except rerballyt before they receiTed
instruction from European Missionaries, was by
means of rude hieroglvpnic symbols. They are now
in possession of a *' syllabic system," a knowledge of
which is diffused through nearly all the tribes com-
posing the entire nation, and in which the Scriptures
and other books have been printed. But the cha-
racters of that system are not adapted for a work of
this description, and therefore the JSoman letters are .
used.

They are a, c, e, g, h, i, k, 1, m, n, o, p, s, t, u, w, r.

Of tiiese, the consonants are sounded as in Englisn,
the TOwels and diphthongs according to the following
table :—

il as a in hate.
i .. far.

A ^ mo*

\

2

ORTHOGRAPUV.

i as i
r „ i

in pin.

„ thino.

„

y, note.

u „ u

„ but.

00 „ oo

„ soon.

ew „ u

„ pure.

ow „ ow „ now.

Some syllables aro strongly aspirated, and for
this the letter ** h " is not always aduptxxl ; the Greek
hard-breathing *, fii-st introduced by Dr. Hunter, is
therefore used. It is usually breathed at the end of
the syllable aspirated, and some words depend on
the aspirate for their signification; thus, Ukochin,
without the aspirate, means simply, he hangs ; but
with it, UkMiin, ho haogs in a liquid, ho floats.

But the aspirate is not uniformly ol)served, some
tribes, and even members of the same tribe, aspi-
rating their words very much more than others ; it is
therefore quite impossible to lay down strict rules
for its observance. This must be left to the student's
own observation, remembering only that the use of
the aspirate is at once the most delicate and difficult
sound to acquire in almost every language.

H is always aspirated.

G is used only in the particle expressing power,
and in the word meaning ability, power, gain : No
fl€ totun, I can do it ; Ke gtuhkctanf I am able for it,
I gain it.

L is uised at Moose Factory only and in its
yicinitv; it adds very much to the distinctness of
the dialect there spoken; in other dialects n^ y, th» or r,
is substituted for it.

In the diocese of Moosonee the pronoun ^ I " ia
ihtis expressed in the different d\a\QC\A\—

NeU ... At Hooao TmIotj «

OBTHOORAPHT.

■ I

Neya- ...
Netha ...
Nora ...

At Albany, Sorem, and York Factory,
On the E. Main coast ; while it is
At English Riyer, and
At Isle k la Crosse.

One othor sound, the ** sh/' is confined principally
to Moose and the neighbonrhood» adding to the varie^
of the dialect: thus, &•»» a dnck« is said at Cnmber-
land, and Se$m$^ a small duck; while at Moose we
hare SkeAqf tor the former, and SketikqfUk tor the
latter..

( 4 )

ETYMOLOGY.

Tlioro arc eight parts of speech : the Noun, Pro-
noun, Adjective, Verb, Adverb, Conjunction, Pre-
position, and Interjection. Of these the Noun,
Pronoun, and Verb are declinable, as is likewise the
Adjective, vrhen verbalized.

There are no Articles, the numeral adjective,
*^payul:,** being substituted for " a,*' as Payuk ililew,
one or a man ; and demonstrative pronouns for ** ihe^*'
wlien it is necessary to particularize persons or things,
as Una i$kwao^ that or ^^ihe" woman; otherwise, the
noun stands alone. Thus the sentence, **The trees
of the forest," requires two definite articles in English,
while in Cree the noun speaks for itself, Miitihouk
nochimik, (the) trees in the forest; noohimik being
an adverb.

< « )

I

OP THE NOUN.

The Noun is often a much less important member
of a sentence in the Cree than in European langoaccs,
as almost all abstract nonns may be, and by Lidians
generally are, expressed in a verbalized form ; thus,
** life " would be expressed as ApimatUenauewukt '* that
they ^definite as_to person) uTe," in preference to
Pk'maltMvin, life ; A aJco$imanewtJ^ ** that they (uidef.)
are sick," in preference to Ahoiemim^ sickness.

I hare known an Indian speak a long sentence on
the duties of married persons to each other^ without
using a sin^e noun.

Of the Terminations of Nouns.

Xouns of different kinds have different termina-
tions.

Abstract Xouns end in win ; as, from TapwAo, he
speaks truly, is formed Topiooima, truth*

Names of instruments end in hm ; as, from Paski-
sckud, he fires, is formed Pt u l nnkun ^ a gun.

Names of liquids end in apo; as, Menish, a berry,
Jfenifil-apo, berry liquor, wine.

Simulative Nouns end in ham ; as, llunito, a god,
Ilunilokan^ an idoL
Munee of lines, cords, chains^ etc., end in a^; an,
/ISlS'^ ^ ^^ MuAMname, a shoe-string; Miko,
^"^^ ^^^^j^ ^ rein.

\

6

OF THE NOUN.

Tlio termination Jcumtk particularizes buildings;
as, Affumchdircl'umil\ a church, lit. a praying-house.

Atik is the termination for the names of trees,
articles made of wood, handles of instruments, etc. ;

Wuskwl,

Wuaktclatik,

Kashkahikun,
KashkaJdkunatiJcj
^lechiso,
Mechisonaiik^

Birch-bark, from which
canoes are made.

The birch-bnrk tree, •'.«. the
birch tree.

A rake.

A rake handle.

He eats.

An eating-board, a table.

Akin terminates the names of different kinds of
cloth, etc. ; as, Pupukewuyan, a shirt, Pujpukewuyan-
dkhi^ shirt-cloth, Lc, calico.

Kume is the termination signifying water; as,
Tukclmne, cold water ; Klchekume^ the great water,
i.e. sea, ocean.

Skow added to a noun indicates abundance; as,
Nunius, fish, NumdskotOj fish abound.

Min (sing.), mvia or minuk (pi.), terminates the
names of berries ; as, Mikomtnukf red berries ; JftfifcAe-
fittna, bad l)crrics (poisonous).

Diminutives end in ish or shUh ; as,

Nap&o, A man.

NapdshUhj A boy.

Iskwao, A woman.

Iskicdihish^ A girl.

This diminutive particle is sometimes repeated to
express a greater degree of smallness ; as, Napdihish'
m7i, a little boy. Kiih after a single or double dimi-
nutive signifies bad, useless, eta. *, qa« 0\«iMMMI^V^iii^
H Bmall nscleaa canoe ; IfaodtkUliuUcUli^ % i^sk^^^^e^
Utile boy. ^^

OP THE NOUN. 7

Personal Nouns, the poor, rioh, eto., arc formed
from adjective verbs :

1st. By prefixing the pronoun '* 0*' to the third
person, indicative mood, present tense ; as, Kitema-
kisew, he is poor ; Kitemakisewuk, they are poor ;
Ohitemakisew, the poor one (sing.); Okitemakiiewukt
the poor (pl.)«

2ndly. The primitive word; representing the
quality is used as the noun ; as, KitemdkU^ the poor
one ; Kitemakisuk^ the poor (pl.\

3rdly. The third person of the subjunctive mood,
flat-vowelled, is used as a noun; as, K&iimaki§et^ the
poor one ; KdtimakUetchUc, the poor (ph).

This extremely interesting form will be explained
and illustrated when we consider the Verb.

The names of animals, parts of the body, and
objects not falling into eitner of the classes above
mentioned, terminate irregularly; as, Umitk^ a
bea^'^r ; MiiHhwan^ the head ; Ifett^, the foot ; &pe,
a river ; Wutcke, a mountain ; JM^, water ; Jfeyow,
the body; ^e&dib, the soul ; O M nne k e ^f a young man.

Of Gender.

There are two Genders, the Animate and Inani-
mate; but a few inanimate objects are treated as
animates.

The principal objects thus treated are, Alukanow,
bread; Upwe^ a paddle; UMk, a kettle; CTfam, a
snow-shoe ; Amihcan, a spoon ; U$ti$f a glove ; Mitoif
a legging ; MekiSf a bead ; Pcwanuk^ a flint ; Pewanu^
koihM^ a gun-cap; Pukw&»kekun^ flour; ITZooimti,
oatmeal. ^

Uyjoff trees^ and most objects possessing yege-
^S^J^^ ^^ ^kewige olaMed as animatea. i

>«MD^ oounm stro eitbw animate or \nwiVma.\fe\ \

8 OF THE NOUK.

among others, Uiine^ a stonOy and the particular
names of bcrncs.

Distinction op Sex.

To mark t]io distinction of sex in animate nonns,
we have,

1st. The use of different words ; as,

yias. Napao^ A man.

Fcm. Ishcnd^ A woman.

Afas. Otaicemotp^ A father.

Fern. Okateemotc^ A mother.

A [as. Okoaiifcmow^ A son.

Fern. Otanisemow^ A daughter.

The last four examples are seldom used, except
when preceded by possessive pronouns, when they
undergo mnch contraction.

2ndly. The addition of i$hoad to the masculine to
express the feminine noun ; as,

^las. OKmoto, A chief.

Fern. Okimaikic&o, A female chief.

3rdly. In the names of all animals, Napdj prefixed,
indicates the male, and Nofhd the female ; as,

Nnpii mi$to»^ A bull.

Noshd miitto8j A cow. I

AVi/Mi $hc9hep, A drake.

Ncmha $he$hep^ A duck.

Of Number.

Nouns have two Numbers, the Singular and the
Plural.

The plural of nonna of ih^ aii\m%\j^ ^gescAet Ss^
formed by adding i, iilr, ox icwt to ^^ vVu^b^'^**

OV THE KOUN. 9

^listik, a trco, MUtikteuk^ trees ; Utim, a £og, ITiftM-
tcuk^ dogs.

The plural of nouns of the inanimate gender is
formed by adding a or tra to the singular; as, Chi-
kahikun, an axe, Ckikahikwia^ axes ; uhepi
a sepulchre, CkepayekunUhDa^ sepulchres.

Cases of Nouns.

Xouiis have four Cases : the NominatiTB, Accusa-
tive, Vocative, and Locative.

There is no Possessive Case ; possession being indi-
cated by the possessive pronouns. The Indian mode
of expression is thus — The man his house ; the men
their house or houses, Le. The man*s house'; the
men's houses.

The Nominative Case exjiresses the noun in its
simplest form.

The Accusative Animate, in the singular number,
is the same as the nominative, when sovemed bv a
transitive verb in the first or seoona person; but
when governed by a verb in the third person, a or
tra is added to the nominative; ss, Ne sakehow
owashish, I love a child; Sakehao owaMika^ ho
lovos a child.

The same iiilo is followed in the plural for the
first and second persons, while in the third the plural
distinction is omitted, and the termination is the
Kaino as in the singular; as, Ne sakchowuk owa-
hhishuk, I love children ; Sakehao awatkuha^ he loves
children ; Sakeh&wuk <nca$kitka^ they love children.

The Aocusative Inanimate, in both numbers, is
th^ j»me as the nominative, when sovemed by a
^unsitive verb in the £nt or seooiuL penon; as,
•;i^*-^^^^^ «w#Mrfl*ifa% I read a book: \wA
~ ^*^^*«»^ Ijr • rerb with a dative wgnifioiAi^^

10

OF TUE NOUN.

the syllable lew is added to the nominative ; as, Xo
molow musimthikitnelcw^ I give him a book.

The accusative singular inanimate generally, not
universally, ends in tew, when governed by a verb
in the singular number ; as, Kwapahum ntpelcWy ho
dips Avatcr. In the plural the accusative is the
same ns the nominative ; as, Eo oshStow nesho tounc'
hihina, lio has made two traps.

The Vocative Case singular is the F^amo as the
nominative ; the plural is formed by adding iok or
etoh to the nominative singular ; as.

Owa»ln»li !
OwasJusJietok I

child I
children !

To this rule there are two exceptions: Notawe,
my father ; Nekawo, my mother.

Voc. Nota or Notawe I My father !
NdJca I My mother !

The Locative Case is formed by adding iJc to tho
nominative; but if the nominative ends in Jk, oh is
added, and h only if it ends in a vowel ; as, Mekewam"
tX-, in the tent ; Ush'tk-okj in tho kettle ; Klchehime-k^
in the sea.

Examjylca of the Vocative Plural.

Na}Hitol\ Btikehikok ket

ifikwilmewowuk,
Iskicdtok^ nunahetakok ke

napumewowuk.
NajHtMshctok nushta m-

kwushtifhctok, tapwuta-

kok ko nekehikowowuk.
lUlctok, ncchesJianetok, nash-

ta otawcmatokf nut&tu*

mok.

Men, love your wives.

Women, obey your hus-
bands.

Boys and girls, obey
your parents.

Men, brethxeiL^ v^^^ ^%r

( 11 )

PEONOTJNS.

There are six daases of Prononxis : the Personal,
Possessive, DemonstratiYe, Belative, Interrogatiye,
and Indefinite.

Pebsonjll Proxouvs.
Singnlar.

I.
Then,

He, It,

Plural.

We (I and he, or I and they).
We (I and thou, or I and you).

You,
They,

Nela.
Eela.
Wela.

Kelanan.
£elananow
Kelanow.
Eelawow.
Welawow.

or

Observe here the double first person plural. It is
a beautiful provision, entirely obviating the in-
definiteness of our own '* We ; ** so that a mistake
cannot occur. A person speaking to another of him-
self and some otner person, uses Nelanan ; if the
person addressed is included with the speaker, then
^ksJananow is used. Every verb in the language,
At?^ zn the indjoatire and^ subjunotive mood, is
oy^M^^ ^ ^j^ A/nuigemeni— in the indioni&f^ mooii

12 PRONOUKS.

by means of tho personal pTX)noun, in the subjanctive
mood by tho inflection of tho verb.

In the singular number, when attached to verbs,
Ncla is contracted into N^ iVe, or Net ; and Kola into X,
Ke^ or Ket. The third personal pronoun is not usually
attached to tho verb, the verbal termination being
sufficiently expressive ; but when it is, it assumes
tlio fonn or Ol. It is placed before one form of
the preterite and pluperfect tenses, indicative mood ;
iis,

saichaCi, He loved him.

I'c saichaCiy He had loved him.

It is likewise placed before words implying pos-
session ; as, Oi owaMhimitheWy he has children. In
this case it is carried through every person and
tense of tho verb ; as. Net ot oiccuhimisJiin^ I have a
child or children ; A ot oioashimithetfok (subjunctive
mood), that ye have children.

In the plural number in tho indicative mood, tho
first part of the personal pronoun is prefixed, and the
latter part afi&xed, to tho root of the verb ; as, Ne
sakeh-anan, we (1st and 3rd) love him; Ke pukwat-
owoWf you hate him.

For the sako of emphasis tho personal pronoun is
repeated; as,

Wepiich Nela ne ka totun.
Soon I I will do it.

In the subjunctive mood no personal pronouns are
attached to the verb, all the persons being expressed
by inflections of the verb itself.

Kdehcwak and tipiUwd^ myself, thyself, etc, under-
go no change ; as,

Xela k&ehewak ne ke^ %yaca^w ^

J

PBOXOUKS.

13

Possessive Pronouhs.

The Possessire Pronouns are the same as the
personal, and are joined to nouns as the personal
pronouns are to Terbs.

O or 0^ his, is always expressed, ezoept when
dropped for the sake of euphony, as in the n)llowing
example :

Noun Animate, Singular.

N'otawe, My father.

K'otawe, Thy father.

O'tawe-a, His father.

N'otawc-nan. Our (l&t and 3rd) father.

K'otawe-now, Our (Ist and 2nd) father.

K*otawe-wow, Tour father.

0*tawe-wow-a, Their father.

Noun Animate, Plural.

Uskik, a koUle.

Not uskik-wuk,
Ket uskik-wuk,
Ot uskik-wa.
Net uskik-onan-uk,
Eet uskik-onow-uk,
Ket uskik-owow-uk,
Ot uskik-owow-a.

My kettles.

Thy kettles.

His kettles.

Our (Istand Srd) kettles*

Our (1st and 2nd) kettles.

Your kettles.

Their kettles.

' And here it is well to notice the form of the
looative case in nouns attached to possessive pro-
nouns. When the pronoun is singular the locative
case is formed in the usual manner, Uti utUi-ol;, in
my kettle or kettles ; but when the pronoun is plural,
ihdj>n>nominal termination is contracted, thus:

J^Bt oBka-^niMK In our (1 and 8) kettle

ar kettlet.
In our (md2^1clrtAft.

14 PRONOUNS.

Kot uBkik-owalc, In your kettle w kettles.

Ot usidk-owak, lu their kettle or kettles.

Xote. — In the word u»li\)i^ the t is pronounced as
in '* peck."

Names of objects beginninp; with wi, principally
membors of the body, drop the w» before the pos-
sessive pronoun is prefixed ; as, Misdhcan^ the head,
Nistll'wattj my hc;id ; JL'sit, the foot, Kcsii, lliy foot.

Nouns Kij^nifying rclationshi]) undergo much con-
traction when preceded by a possessive pronoun, as
before mentioned; as, Omoshomimow, a grandfather,
becomes Nc meshom^ my grandfather, and Ohomimow^
a grandmother, becomes Nokom, my grandmother.

Utinif a dog, l)ecomes Nctam^ my dog, etc.

A few nouns require O, o<, to be changed into IT,
as llie prefix for his, their; as, Neyow, my body,
Weijow^ his body; Neki^ my tent, Wekitoow^ their
tent.

Many nouns connected with possessive pronouns
take the particle tii, tm, or om after them ; as, Mistik,
a stick, Ne miatilc-om, my stick; Waskahikun, a
house, Ne tcaskahikun-im, my house. In this case
the plural terminations follow the particle; as, ^e
waskahikuniiU'Cnan^ our house (1, 3).

In some dialects the particle precedes the last
syllable with the word Owashish^ a child; as. Net
oira«/i-tmi</i, my child; in others it follows the
general rule, Net awashUh'tm,

Examples of Possesaice Pronoun and Inanimate Noun,
Muchitotumowin, sin, evil deed.

Singular.

No muchitotumowin^ "NL^ %Vcv«
Ko muchitotumo^Ti, ^1^*^ ii^^"^*

PBOXOUNS.

15

O n)uc1iIt4)tnmowm, His sin.

No iiiiichitotumowin-ouan, Our (1 and 3^ sin.

Ko miichitotumowin-onow. Our (1 and 2) sin.

Ke miichitotumowin-ewow, Your sin.

O mucliitotumowin-owow. Their sin.

Plural.

Nc miichitotumowin-at 3Iy sins.

Ko miichitotumowin-ay Thy Kins*

O muchitotumowin-ay Ilis sins.

No muchitotumowin-onan-a, Our (1 and 3) sins.

Ko muchitotumowin-inaw-a, Our ^1 and 2) sins.

Ke uiuchitotnmowin-owow-a, Your sins.

O mucliitotumowin-ewow-a. Their sins.

ExamplcM of the Use of the Po99emve ProitotoL

No kunawt'ilemowuk net
owashimishuk,

He sakehimowa ot owa-
sliimisha,

Piitowin net ustisuk,

Kichistapu^vulin mitone
ne luuchatisewinik
otche,pulrikohin maka
ne muohototumowinik
otcho,

Tantu atat Zretanis?

^etanis ashi posow,

Ko ko patanawow na he
_ musinahikunetroira?
Aa; no ke p&tanan ne

musinahikunenaiia,
JdiOotwachik ililewuk

Itake caiBof myohildren.
I love his children.

Bring to me my mittens.

** Wash me throughly finnn
mine iniquity, and
cleanse me from my sin.'*

Where is thy daughter?
My daughter has already

gone off ^hy water).
Have you brought your

books?
Yes ; we have brought our

books.
Gkx)d Indians teach their

children.

10

PRONOUNS.

Tub Double Possessivk. j

The Doublo Possessive, as My 80u*s son (C'ree, M\
son his son), when the noun possessed is of the
animate gender, is formed as the possessive of the
tliird iKrson when the possessive pronoun is of
the fii'st or second persons, my, your, etc. ; but
when the iK>ssessive pronoun is of the third person,
the particle iliwa is added to the noun in both the
nominative and accusative cases, and the singular
and plural numbers.

Net an 18 okosisa,
Kctiinis okosisa,
Otanisa okosis-iliwa,
Netanisenan okosisa,

Ketanisinow okosisa,

Ketanisowow okosisa,
Otanisowowa okosisiliwa,

X.D. — Otanisa okosisili-
wa,

Otanisewowa okosis-ili-
wa.

I^Iy daughter's son.
Thy daughters son.
His daughter's sou.
Our(l and 3) daughters

son.
Our (1 and 2) daughter^

son.
Your daughter's son.
Their daughter's sou.

His daughter's son, or his

daughter's sons.
Their daughter's son, or

their daughter's sons.

Exampk'.

Kutta kiskinohumuwao He will teach his chil-

ot owashimisha, nash- dren and his children's

ta ot owashimisha ot children,
o washi 1*11 isht'Ziioa,

AVhen the nonn of posaoaaioxL \!& \xk<^vcBi^^ ^^
general rulo for noana ia \o \>q WCLw?^ ^\tfstw'^^
/vsfossivo pronoun ib of t\ve ftt%\. « wswsA \«cijs«^

moKOUxs.

17

but when of the third penon, tlew is to be added
o the noun for the singnlAr number, iliwa for the
Jural.

Xekoeis o musinahikun, M^ 8on*8 book.
Okosisa o musinahikun- His son's book«

tfc?r,
Okosisewowa o musinahi- Their sons' books.

kun-t&'tMiy

Tipibiwd is the pronoun signifying own, my own,
thy own, ete.

Nela tipSuwd no paskise- Mine, my own gun*
kun,

Demonstiutite Pbonouxs.
The Demonstrative Pronouns are.

Owa,

Tnis.

An. Sing.

Oma,

t*

Inan.

Oko,

These,

An. PL

Oho,

9»

Inan.

Una,

That,

An. Sing.

line, xmema.

vt

Inan.

Uneko,

Those,

An. PL

Unehe,

♦f

Inan.

Kotuk,

The other, another. An. and Inan.

Sing.
An. PL

Kotukeyuk,

The other.

Kotukeya,

t«

Inan.

Awuko,

The selfsame.

An. and Inan.

Awukowa,

This selfsame one,

An.

Awuk oma.

t«

Inan.

Awukwana,

That,

An.

Awukwanema,

If

Inan.

ThoBB,

An.

^"^i^-WMaelM,

99

Inan.

18

rnoNouNs.

Thcso pronouns Iiave all an accusativo case end-
ing, when the noun for which thoy stand or to
which they are joined is governed by a verb in the
third person.

Kom,

Ace.

Owa. •

Oho.

Oma.

Omfilcw.

PI.

Omulowa.

Oko.

Oho.

Una.

Unehe.

Une, uncma.

Unehulew.

PI.

Unchalowa.
Unemalow.

PI.

Unemalowa.

Uneko.

Unehuliwa.

TTnche.

TJnehulewa.

Awnko.

Awukwalew.

PI.

Awnkw&lewa.

Eotnk.

An.

Eotnkeya.

Inan. Eotnkelew.

In pointing out a thing particularly, as with the
finger, TJnema is changed to Ndma ; as, Nama^ that
one thore.

Examjie$ of the Demmutraiice Pronoum.

Una ka tapwayalemit

iiumawoskat kutta ni-

pew,
Unehe ka sakchiskik ne

ka milwukimowuk,
Eichomunito kistulimilo

unehe ka kist&limikot,
Kutta apuchitow twekd-

lew mokonanilew,

** He that believeth in me
shall never die.'*

Those that love thee I

will bless.
Grod honours those who

honour him.

PB0N0UM8.

10

Ova nistOB natpich wo- ThiB ox i» yory fat.

Ulo,

Oko mnakisina anooh no lliooe shooa I liaYo jimt

ke oahetan, mado.

Reultivr Phokoux.

Thero is but ono Bolativo Fronomi, '^ka,** who,
which, that; its antooodent is frequently under-
•tood. It ^yems the subjunctiye mood. When
the yerb is m the future tense, it becomes **kA; *' as,
Una ililew ka tukoshik, the Indian who will come.

Hero ka is not only a rolatiye pronoun, but it is
also the sign of the future tense.

ExampUi of the Belatire Prancnn.

'•/.

TTneko owashinhuk ka
kiskilletnkik klcho mn-
■tnahikunolew kutta
nunahetuwiipunuk o
nckehikowowa,

lb wekistjln menitiha ka
milwashike,

Ve wekipwowuk ka milo-
shishichik numasuk,

Una ka sakekut akosew.

Those children who know
the Bible should obey
their parents.

I like (the taste of) berries

which are good.
I like (the taste of) good

fish.
** He whom thou loyest is

sick.'*

IXTIItBOOATiyE PbOXOUXS.

'The Interrogatiye Pft>nouns are,

Owikm^ VTho? An. Sing.

OtraoeJte^ „ ^ PL

^^^^^^^w»ua Aoaasmtive, Ow&Iewa, when gcrretnc^

•JH

PRONOUNS.

by a verb in the third penon. When followed by
H notin with tho possessive pronoun, third person,
Otn'nta answers to whose; as, Owana ot nstotin?
WhoKo ( = who) his cap is this ?

Tauawana,

Which?

An. Sing.

Tan unckc,

»»

.. PI.

Tan uncma, gene-

>»

Inan. Sing.

rally contracted

into Tanema,

Tnn unche,

««

., PI.

Kako,

Which?

An. and Inan.

Kukwau,

What?

Inan. Sing.

Kukwaua,

t*

„ PI.

Kukwanilow or

Ace. gov. by verb

Kukwalow.

in 8rd person.

Owuna and Eakwto take a simulative or doubtful
f<»nn, thus :

Owanekan,

Owunokanuk.

Kilkwananuk,

Who?

ft

Sing.

ri.

What?

< )wanckan pcutastumo-

tat?
Owanckan toka, numa-

wela ne kiskalotun,
Owauckanuk peutastumo-

tlchik ?
Owanckan etokunuk, nu-

niawela ne kiskuletun,

Who is this walking this

way?
Who it is I do not know.

Who are these walking

this way ?
Who they are I do not

know.

Tho particles which follow the pronouns will be
explained when the Verb is consLdoxod*

PR0N0UK8.

21

Examples of the Interrogative Pronouns,

Ovaaa ka pukitinitiflot
kitche nntawo kiskino-
liumawat ililewa ?

Oirdneke ka poche weche-
hitchik?

Kako musinahikTin ka tu-
konumun ?

Kdhean ka totuzoatan?

Tan atwilytin?

Tan utwut ?

Tanema piko, numuwela

._ ne kiskfilotTiD,

Who will dedicate him-
self to go and teach the
Indians ?

Who (pi.) vdH come to my
aasiatance?

What book is that whicli
you have in your hand ?

What shall I do for thee ?

What sayest then?

What docs he say ?

What it is I do not know.

COMFOLXI) liELATlVE PBONOUXS.

They are — Whoever, with its accosative, whom-
soever, whichever, whatsoever. These have a morv
wide and universal signification than the simple
relatives; they are oxpressed by the animate pn»-
noun Owilna, inanimate K&kwan, and the relative
** ka," but require the verb to be in the dnbitative
mood. AVhcn the verb is flat-vowelled, Ira is omitted.

Examples of Uie Compound Bdative Pronouns.

Owana wa nospinusliikwa^

Wasa otodna wa pimachi-
takw& o pimatisewin
kutta wunetow ; owAna
maka ka wiinetakw& o
pimatisewin nela otohe,
kutta miskum,

i?tpdma led ixiiSimowxikSi^

^ ^yho6oever will come

after me."
«* For whosoever will save

his life shall lo«e it;

and whosoever will lose

his life for my sake,

shall find it"

*' Whomsoever I shall
kiss, ibe tasnA \a\i»r

*>•>

1'RONOUNS.

DisTuiiioTivE Pronouns.

'11

ruto,

Misewu into,

Each, ever}*,
Yjach of all.

An. and Inan.

Example,

Shawaletakotfew miscwa ** Blessed is every one that
tuto owuna ka nnncches- feareth tho Lord."
towat Tap&lechikale-
c'he.

^litfcwu,

Atit,

Mucliat,

Chukawashish,

Kotok,

Owana,

Kukwan,

Indefinite Pronouns.

Tliey are — ^All, some, many, few, other, something.

All. An. and Inan.

8ome,

Many,

Fow, An. and Inan.

Other, another.

Some one. An.

Something, Inan.

For declension of Eotnk jce Demonstrative Pro-
nouns, and for Owana and Kakwan see Interrogative
Pronouns.

Mechat and chukawashish frequently take a
verhalized form, being declined through their various
moods and tenses like the plurals of other intransi-
tive verbs.

Examplei of the Indefinite Pronoune,
Oicana ne ke saminik, ** Some one hath touched

me.

If

Mcua wapumittanA ke ka When I see you a^dn.1.
melittin k&kwcm^ yffi^ ^^ ^^s<^ ^kqa

PBOXOUHS.

23

Misewd ililewuk kutta

sakehittopunuk,
Ne nutawftlet&n koiuk mi-

nekwakuxiy
Ne we kiskinohumawo-

wnk iofttieyiil ililewuk

nadche,
Jesus sakeh&d MtiMioA owd-

All Indians should lore

each other.
I denre another cap.

X wish to teach other
Indians also.

Jesus lores erexy one.

( 24 )

ADJECTIVES.

AnJExrrivEs aro gonorally verbiilizcd ; as, Malotwat
ililow, ho who is good tho Indian = the good Indian.

Thore aro fow Soparablo Adjectives in the Creo
language ; such are Kiche, great ; Milo, good ; Muche,
bad ; Oshke, new ; Pulake, holy ; Kwayusk, right :
but adjectives may bo formed from abstract nouns
by omitting the final *' n ; " as Ayumehawin, prayer,
Ayumchawe musinahikun, a Prayer-book.

Tho Comparative of adjeotives is formed by pro-
fixing UusasiUi^ more, to the positive ; and the ouper-
hitivo by prefixing Mawueh^ most.

Milotwow,
Uwasita milotwow,
Mawuch milotwow.

lie is good,
lie is better.
lie is best.

Examples of Separable Adjectivei.

Jdilo owashishuk naspich

sakehakunewewuk,
0«/iX;H)washishuk naspich

sakehiko^vuk okawe-

wowa,
Muehe ililewuk numawela

tapakaletakosewuk ki-

tche it6ti&ohik fcldie W
Mbikok^

Good children are much

beloved.
Young (new) children are

much beloved by their

mothers.
Bad men are not fit to go

to heaven^

ADJUCTIVE8.

2.%

Xe sakotowan Kichemu- I love God's holy Word,
nolo pulake ayome-
win.

Theso are ail capable of being verbalised, bat are
more generally nsed a» ■epaiaUe adjeotivee ; they
are»

Paynk,

One.

Ncsho,

Two.

Nisto,

Three.

Niui,

Four.

Noyalnl,

Five.

Nokotwas,

Six.

Neiiwas, Tapnk6p,

Seven.

Yananiid,

Eight.

( Shaketat,
: raynkoat&d.

Mine.

( Eakat metat*

MoUt,

Ten.

1 PayukoBbap,

Eleven.

1 Motat puyukoabap.

Ncshotthap,

Twelve.

Nistotthap,

Thirteen.

Shop means *'and/' therefore Nistosha^ is eauiva-
lent to, '' and three.'* AVith some tribes it is always
necessary to express the ten in all numbers between
ton and twenty ; as, Metat nistoshaip, ten and three-
more, t.€. thirteen.

NtidebAp, etc Fourteen, etc.

Neabitunow^ Twentj.

^Tas^'taaovrpftyukoehau, Tw«o^-^^^

26

ADJEGTIYJES.

Namitanow,
Neyalilo-mi tanow,
Nekotwaso-mitanow,
Ncswaso-mitanow,
Yanana-mitanow, *
Shakotato-mitanow,

Forty.
Fifty.
. Sixty.
Seventy.
Eighty.
Ninety.
A hundred.

^letato-mitanow,

{Neshwow metato-mitauow. Two hundred.
Nesho metato-mitanow.

The former expression means twico a hundred.

Kiche mitato-mitanow, A great hundred, a

thousand.

It is not difHcult to express comparatively largo
numbers in Crce ; thus 4507 would be rendered —
Nuwow klche-mitat'>mitanow(four times athousand),
neyalilo-mitato-mitanow (five hundred), nekotwaso
mitanow neswasoshap (and sixty-soven).

Example* of Numeral Adjectives,

Ne ko wa]nimowuk neyalul

wapuskwuk,
Anoch ka otakoshik ne ke

Roknhatuwowuk mid o-

washishuk,
Pfilfuk ililew ke nipuhao

niimttanote utikwa po-

poonok,
Tuntuto keshikowa k&

itapichoyun ?
Niunawela kwayusk ne

kisk&letiln ; maskoeh

tifio keshikowa no ka

itapichen^

I havo seen fivo white

bears.
This afternoon I havo

baptized four ohildren.

One Indian killed forty
deer last winter.

How many days shall you
be absent?

I don't quite know ; per-
haps 1 shall bo %.biM^

ADJBCriirES.

27

Just now five geeae and
seven dncks flow this
way, and then flew ont
to sea.

Six days thou shalt

labour.
Jesus chose twelve dis*

ciples.

Jesns fasted during forty
days and forty nights^

There are no Ordinals ezoept Neshtnm, first, and
M ach i ch , Iskwayaoh, last ; these are indedlinaUe.

Anoch neyalul noskuk
niishta neswas sheshe-
puk ke papolowuk, ako
niaka tawichik uspula-
chik,

NekoUccuo kcsliikowa ko
ka utooskan,

Jesus ke wawAlapum&o
nahoikap kiskinonuma-
wakuna,

Jesus ke nokuso ishpish
namiianaw keshikowa
n&shta nUmitaiuno ti-
piskowa.

( 28 )

THE VERB.

The Verb expresses being, iloing, and suffering, as
in other languages ; but it also expresses, by its pre-
fixes and afHxes, a great deal more — namely, that
wliicli in other tongues is expressed by the use of .
ailjectives, adverbs, and other parts of speech, in-
creasing and diminishing the action, affirming, sujp-
})osing, doubting, simulating, reflecting, etc. It is,
indeed, not only the principal word in every sen-
tence, but it is frequently the sentence itself; and
the whole language might bo aptly styled a gigantic
verb. He; tlion, that would master the Creo lan-
guage, let him master the verb, and his work will
bo wellnigh accomplished.

In the study of the verb three things are to be
specially bomo in mind :

1. There is no Infinitive Mood in the language.
What is expressed in others by the infinitive mood
is resolved in this into the subjunctive.

ThuH, Kng. I wish you to come, is in (Jree, I wish
that you come, Ke nutawalemittinawow kitdie tuko-
tihindk.

'J. All Transitive and Intransitive Verbs have a
double first jx^rson plural, for which, as before stated,
they have corresponding pronouns.

3. Verbs ha^o tvro CaiBi^ \5ck<^ ^Rj^ii&^^ ^xiS^^»«-
which aro very "^j^xuil^^^ Vi \3«^g»2«i«cv,'^«^

THE VERB.

29

which oondaoe greatly to clearness of expression in
the lan^age. Difficulties in conversation would
constantly occur were they not in existence, whereas,
by their use, doubt and ambiguity are entirely
avoided.

There is nothing analo^us to the Relative Verbal
Case in English. In its simplest form, in connection
%vith impersonal verbs, it is expressed by the par-
ticle lew in the indicative mood, and lik in the
subjimctive. Its meaning is, relatively to him or
them. Thus,

Mispoon, It snows.

Mispoon-tfetr, It snows relatively to

_ him.

A mispook. As it snows.

A mispoon-e/ft. As it snows relatively to

him.

Xumawela ne ka Idtotan I shall not go ofi^ as it

ft mispook, snows.

Xumawela kutta kitotilu He will not go off, as it

A mispoon-eltl, snows.

There is no relative case in a sentence, unless
there be in it a verb in the third person.

The relative case is used where either of the
persons, first, second, or third, performs an action
relativdy to another third person ; as,

Ne ke wapumow & pi- I saw him when (I)

mota-trtijb, walking.

Ee ke wapumow & pi- Thou sawest him when

moiA'UnU, (thou) walking.

Tbia 19 perhaps the most peTp\«ian^*7«t\»\ yaaald
^^ the isiijfaage— the relative oaa^ ot Ml\n^lX%s^\^sc<«^
''»*, when in the subjunoiive xawaL, Ti»cMi&\ft&ik^

'M TIIK VEKU.

traiisitivo temiinntions to bo pvcn to tho first and
second persons, making tho verb, in fact, a semi-
transitivo one; but vrhon a third porson acts rela-
tively to another third j)er8on tliis is entirely
roTcrsed, for it is not tho verb which agrees with
tho nominative he which takes the relative case, but
that which agrees witli tho accusative him : e.g.

Ke wapumoo a pimotut, Uo saw him (when he

waH) walking.
Ko wapumuu & pimotu- lie saw him toallcing,
UchCf

This will become clearer as we progress onward.
Tho simplest form of tho Possessive Case is that in
which a verb agrees with a second third person
which belongs to a first third person : as, That man's
son is sick. Here wo cannot use tho simple verb,
and say, I^na ililew okosisa akosew, that man's son
he is sick, for the person addressed would bo in doubt
as to who was meant — ^the man or his son, the verb
agreeing with tlie noun man. We therefore say,
XJna ililew okosisa akos-tleira, which may be thus
analyzed :

Una ililew. That man,

Okosisa, His son,

Akosilewa, His him is sick.

AVhen the second third person is of the inanimate
gender tho particle lew is added to the sim]ilo
inanimate verb for the singular, and Uetca for the
plural; as,!

Owa owashish o musina- This child's book is good.

liikun milwashin-tfeiff,

Owa owashish o musina- This child's books at<i

hilrana milwastain-Ue- %ckA«

THE YERD. 31

A moro elaborate form of the possessive will oome
under notice by-and-by, when wo oome to the
Transitive Verb ; for every transitive verb has its
possessivo form, both animate and inanimate, with
which it is absolutely necessary for the student to
become thoroughly acquainted.

No sakehimoxva, I love his him.

No pukwatumwan, I hate his it.

TnE Different Kinds of Verbs.

Verbs are of three kinds : Impersonal, Intransitive,
and Transitive.

Before oven the Impersonal Verb can be declined
it is necessary to know the powers of the verb " to
be.** If, for instance, wo say *' It is winter ; ** how
is the "is" expressed?

But first, of the Substantive Verb.

This verb, expressing heing^ existence, has given
me much trouble, which I would fain save those
who come after me. Negatively, one heard it con-
stantly, both in its animate and inanimate forms ; as,
Numa tao owuna, there is no one; Numa tukwun,
there is none; as well as in its affirmative inani-
mate form, l\ikwun, there is some. What was
wanted was the corresponding animate for Tukwun.
For this was used Itow, which is a particular, not
the substantive verb, and si^ifies place ; as. He is
here or there, at a place specified. Cutting off the
initial *' I," we have Tow, the verb sought for; thus.

Tow or Tao, He is.

Tukwun, It is.

On the East llain ooast Tao is always used, both

far a£Srmation and ne^tion; wYkVLb ouXJi^^'^cs^Aru

Mbore ofJSndaon'a Bay Tao is tiaoi ik^%%&^^^ ^n^^«

:VJ

THE TERB.

Aifow 18 n second substantive verb, and ih used vl»
both auimato and inanimate :

Ayow, He ia.

Ayow, It is.

But this verb is used as an animate mostly in
combination with the adjective Milo, good, signifying
that the subject of the verb is in a good state of
health; thus,

^lilo-ayow, He is well.

No milo-ayan, I am well.

Other Verbi expressing Being, etc.

1 . Awew, lie is such an one.

Ewun, It is such a thing.

Airtw is sometimes used alone, but very seldom,
both it and ewun being generally used as tenninations
to nouns, which they thus vernalize ; as,

Okimow, A chief.

Okima-ircic, He is a chief.

AVastunumakun, A candle.

W^astunuraakun-eioam, It is a candle.

He is at a certain place.
At IS „ ,, ,,

He is so; Ukcwiee ho so

does.
It happeuH.

2. An. I tow,
Inan. Itukwun,

3. An. Itcw,

Inan. Ekin,

Itew is only used as a verb of condition inter-
rogatively, or as an answer to a question ; as,

Tan iitcifuu 7 What aileth thee?

Tan iVU f What aileth him ?

Tanoma piko, numawela What it is, I don't know
no kisk&letAn tan d(ofc- 'wYaI ^^<^jOc^V\^.

THE yiRB. 33

4. A Particlo generally Bupj^lies the place of the
verb in such expressiona as It is I, it is he, etc. ; as,
Nclu o, akawcla kostachik, ** It is I, be not afraid.**

The principal particles thus used are 0, Matana
(frequently contracted into Ma), Osbane (oontraoted
into Osha), and Ota

In impersonal Terbs the ^ is *' is expressed by a
verbal termination, affixed to the primitive particle ;
as,

Tok-ayow, It is cold.

Tipisk-ow, It is night.

Pip-oon, It is winter.

Tlie Interrogative particle is Na^ and follows
verbs, oxpn)58cd or understood, in the indicative
mood only ; thus,

Ke sakehin. Thou lovest me.

Ke sakehin na ? I>ost thou love me ?

Kelana? Is it thou?

To Verbs belong Voice, Mood, Tense, Gender,
Number, I'erson, and Case.

Verbs generally have three Voices — ^Transitive,
Passive, and Intransitive, corresponding thus with
the European verb.

Verbs have six Moods — ^the Indicative, Subjunctive,
Imperative, Potential, Suppositive, and Dubitative.

The Indicative affirms or denies, and is used in
asking a direct question ; as,

Kichemunito ke keoshe- Ctod made us.

hikonow,

Ke ka keshetan na ket Shalt thou finish thy work

aimtisewin an6ch k& to-day?
JreghikBkF

-^aioMwetlA; mMskoch wa- No ; perhapa to-moTraw \

PoiM ne la keabeimn, ahall fimi^lt.

i\

34 TIIK VERC.

The Subjunctivo is of much moro exteiisivo iiso
m the Crco than in the English language, cxpross-
ing not only doubt and coutingoncy, but likowise
aitirming ; and in almost evory sentence composed of
two members joined by a conjunction, the second
verb assumes the subjunctive mood ; as,

Xe ka nutawapumow, I Fhall go to him, and
uko maka hi wcchawuk^ then I %vill accompany

him.

Keshpin Miloptmatisct/ana If I am well I shall bo
ne ka itapuchen us- absent the whole win*
kune ])ipook, ter.

The Imperative commands, exhorts, and entreats.
It has a pieM)ut and future tense.

Mcchiso, Eat thou f Pr.).

^Icchiso-Xrun, Kat thou (Fut.).

Sak&ta, Love thou it f Pr.)-

Sakota-ilrifii, Love thou it (Fut.).

The Potential expresses power, will, ability ; as,

Ne ff€ totun, I can do it.

Xe ka ge totafk^ I oould have done it.

Wc is the optative particle; as,
Xe tee sakehow, I wish to love him.

The Suppositivo expresses probability and expec-
tation; as,

Wcpuch kutta tukoshin- Soon they will probably
o/o2:ri-nuk, arrive.

The Dubitative is the subjunctive of the supposi-
tive, and expresses doubt and uncertainty; it like-
wise follows Ow&na wheii »^\l^Il^'WckS5«^^sl:^^v»-
as mcntionaii under Com^\wJL 'BA».\iN^^'^K«ws««

TUB VERB.

35

If 70 love me, ye willkeep
my commandments."

I don't know whether ho

will como.
If they love mo they will

f)Loy me.
If he were well, he would

come.

Keshpiu mikchcicakica ko

ka kimawulotilnawow

ne kakuskwriwina,
Nnmawola ne kisktlletiln

ha tukoshiaokuM^
Kcshpin «c/cX:eAt/-trair<7 no

ka tapwutakwiik,
Koshpin maloplmatisikwd

kiitta tukoehinopun,

The Participial Mood of other languages is ex-
2>rc88cd by the subjunctive ; as,

Nela ii Makehewayan^ I loving.

a J:e »akc1ieieityan^ I having loved.

a sakehikoweyaH, I being loved.

d he Bok'elUkouirifaHf I having been loved.

Jcsos, greatly loving (bo-
cause he loves) mo, died
for me.

Jesus, teabhing, showed us
how we ought to live.

9f

■»♦

»f

Jesus, naspich u adkeklU
ne ke nepostumak,

Jesus, a kiskinohutnakaU
ko ke waputilikonow
kal itatiseyukopun.

The Fjjlt Vowel.

The student will have observed that when x>Artii
-of the verb to love have been introduced, the com-
mencement of the word has been take, but that
occasionally it has been seake ; and further, had he
been able to distinguish the moods, he would have
found that, when the change occurred, the verb was
jnvBriAhfy in either tho subjunctive or dubitative
mootL TbiM change is called t\ie YVat Vowel, and is
<>ne of the most interoaUug poiata Va N2i^^ ^x^

3r.

TIIK VKRn.

All vcrl)s are subject to this chanp^, which con-
sists in flattening, and thus lengthening, the first
vowel ill the verb, and sometimes, as in Sedkehat,
in giving it an additional syllable. As I have just
hinteil, this cliango is confined to the subjunctive
mood.

It is u>ed,

1. In giving a verb the force and properties of a
noun, as already stated in the chapter on Nouns.

2. Instead of the relative pronoun Jca, when the
time is indefinite ; thus, Kela ka sokatisoyun, thou
who art powerful, becomes Kola 9cokaiiscijun^ thou
powerful one. In the second person both singular
and plural, this fonn is vor^^ forcible as a vocative.

n^. Where the particle crer occurs in English,* as
**whocvcr," etc., when the time is indefinite.

4. In some cases, in asking questions, after the
pronouns Owana and Tan, and the adverb Tantu,
when the time is either indefinite, present, or quite
recent ; as.

Owana U'lpdHmifk ?
Tan iiUrat 7
TantTi iitat ?
Tantu Citotat ?
Tan aUisichlk ket owa-
shimiifhuk ?

AVho governs thee ?
What does he say ?
AVhere is he ?
Whore has he gone?
What is the number of
thy children ?

h. But its chief use is to give force and decision
to verbs of affirmation in the past tense, where, the
tense particles being dispensed with, the verb itself
states its action with a power and precision truly
beautiful,

Ako neamiskwalii n&slxta **KTidL\3kft\««^>c:\^''^^;^
prd'iiinat ot Achakwa, wA^^^xk^^^V^**^

THB VERB.

37

Formation of the Ckange*

A itt ohangoil hy prefixing un e^ thus forming an
additional syllable; Anhinuwahit boooming JBaahi-
nnwahit ; S&kisit, Seakisit.

A follows iho samo rulo ; as,

Atuwalomat,
JilaliUemat,

JBfitnwalomat.
M«alriIomat.

When e is the initial letter it ik preceded hy i,
forming a separate syllable ; but wlien it follows a
consonant it im changed into a ; as,

/ekntHnat.
Wakit.

^tashit
Mashikitit.

Kkiitnnat,
Wekit.

I is changed into ci ; as,

Itashew,
Mishikitit,

/ takes e before it as a separate syllable ; as,

Titcw, JSitit, "written better

perhaps EayetU.

becomes lea as the initial letter. When it follows
a consonant it is preceded by e, which is joined to
ihb consonant, the o itself becoming a separate
iiyllable; as,

Oshctat,
Lotik,

U is changed into a ; as,

Ukolat.
Mushkowiset,

Oif im cbADged info tea ; as,

Xoonewukf

IFoshctat.
Ltfotik.

Ukolat.
Mctshkowjset.

"KwOIk^NtTSil^

o

H TIIK VKRll.

TKXsf:<.

The Jnilicativo Mood has hi jc Tenses — tho IVcsciit^
Imperfect, l*erfect, riupcrfect, Future, and Second
Future.

Tho Present relates to what ik now taking place ;
ii8, Nc ptmatiscn^ I live.

The Imperfect relates to what has ^mssed, or has
long continued at a time now pitsfsed ; as, Ne aakehad,
I loved, was loving, ttr did love him.

Tho Perfect represents tho action as finished, or,
when qualiljed Ly an adverb, as still continued ; as,
Xe ke toiumowotc, I have done it for him ; Kintrash tw
Lr utipalenwtoioicow, I have long trusted in him.

'I'ho Pluperfect represents the action as finished
wlien or lK>foro another began ; 08, Ne kc vutamati
]uiuni08ho ko wctumawcyun, I had called him before
you told me.

Tho Future reprc^fcntH the action as yet to conio ;
<iH, Kuttn piwadtehftft misowu ku pilcho natikot, lie
will savo all who will come to him.

The Future Perfect, or Second Future, indioites
that the action will be over when or before another
action, yet future, shall take place; as, Kulta kc
kcMhctapitn ot aputisewin panmosno matwutinolik, he
will have finished hit< work before it (tho bell) rings ;
Ne kn kiMtin paumoshe tukoshik, I shall have de-
parted before ho arrives.

There is nothing very foimidablo in this array of
tenses, for all, both in tho indicative and potential
moods, aro formed from tho present and past of the
indicative, b}' means of particles place<l beforo the
root of the verb, without any new inflexions what-
ever. Lot the student then loam thcso tenses tho-
rovghlv, and he will ha\^ \\\A^^ ^\^<c»N.Vs ^f^>5^ *^«^
rest belonging to the two taqoSli^ \ci<^\i>L\^Xi^«

TIIK VEKIl. ^0

\o wapumow, I sco him.

No ka wapumow, I shall sco him.

No wapiir.iati, I saw him.

Ne ka ko wapumatly I shall havo scon him.

Thoro is not that strict attention to tcnso among .
Indians as thero is with Europeans. In narration
the present is often, or generally, used for the past,
while the past and perfect are almost intcrchange-
ahle, except that as an emphatic the past has much
the preference. There is but little diflforence too
between the past and pluperfect, No ke wapumati
lx>ing quite as frequently used as Ne wapumati for
I saw him.

In the Subjunctive, too, thero are two principal
Touses, the J ^resent and Past, from which tho rest
arc formed by placing particles before them; thus,

A plmasheyan, Because I sail.

A 1-6 pima.«iheyan, Because I have sailed.

A pimnsheyapan, Because I sailed.

A ke pimasheyapan, Because I had sailed.

IMPEKSONAL A^EKBS.

Impersonal Verbs are those which have the third
lYcrson singular only, and in English are preceded by
the pronoun ** it ; " as, Kimewun, it rains ; Mispoou.
it snows ; Keshikow, it is day.

Indicativk Mood.

Pres. Pipoon, It is Annter.

Pi/xx>zi-i]ewy „ ,. to him.

J^ast^ Pipoou-opnUf It wwi muVjct,

M -iiepun, n ^1 Vi\i\\su

40 TIIE VERB.

Por. Ko pipoou. It has boon winter.

„ „ -ilow, „ „ to Liui.

riu. Ko pipoon-opnn, It liad boon winter.

„ -ilopuu, „ „ to liiui.

l\it. Kutta pipoon, It will bo winter.

„ -ilew, „ „ to him.

8. F. Kuttu ko pipoou-opun. It will havo, etc.

„ „ -ilepun, „ „ to him.

SUDJUNCTiV£ M001>.

Pi'di. A pipook, As it is winter.

„ pipoon-ilik, „ ., to him.

I'ast. „ pipook-opuuy „ was winter.

„ pipoon-ilik-02)un, „ „ to him.

Per. „ ko pipook, „ has been winter.

„ ke pipoon-ilik« „ „ to him.

Plu. „ ko pipook-opun, ., had been winter.

„ ko pipoon-ilik-opnn, ,, „ to him.

Flit. Kal pi{K>ok, It will bo winter.

,, ])ipoon-ilik, „ „ to him.

Fut. Pi|ioku, When it shall bo winter.

J^ilKKin-iliku, „ „ to him.

l*ri(K)ok(flatvowol), In the winter (past).

rripoonelik, „ „ to him.

SuJUKWiTiVK Mood.

Pros. Pipoon-otoka, It is winter, I suppose.

Fut. Kutt.t - )ipoon-otokil, It will bo Mrinter,! suppose.

ExamjdeB of the Impcr$onal Verb.

Asbf wwJil'owiUiH^ Already it is frozen ; there

is frost.
Xumuwela ne ka posin I shall not ^ off ^by
wAsa A ifokilotedk^ water) as it ia bU^^vo^"^

TUB VERB.

41

Tapwa ke latin koMhekak^

Mosliuk akosow notanis
d leesliatoayaUky

Wcpuch kistcnach katta
otitolmmwuk d uuhi-
hiWfUik^

Ashr milicashinotokd u
pimdtanowuk nochi-
mik wABkueli ka akwu-
tik,

Kukat ko kuwuchowuk
owashishuk makwach
ka itotdchik kiski-
nohnmakawckumikok,
uaspich d Are kcainalik^

Maskoch kutta milokeshi'
koio loapukd, a mikwusk'
icuk anoch a otakoshik ;
dko maka kd go kitotd-
yan,

TaiiiHpe kd posit kotawo ?

IVapuuilika kutta posew
uiilokesJtikdUkii^

Truly it waa blowing to-
day.

My daughter is alwayn
sick mien tho weather
is warm.

They will soon probably
reach it Tthoir destina-
tion), as tne wind is fair.

There is probably good
walking in the woods
now, as it frozo long
since.

The children weixj nearly
frozen while going to
school, tho cold having
been very fiovei-e.

Perhaps it will bo fine
weather to-morrow, as
the sky is red this
afternoon; and then I
shall be able to go oil'.

AVhen will thy father go
oflf (by water) ?

lie will go off to-morrow
Khould the weather lio
fine.

INTRANSITIVE VERBS.

Intransitive Verbs are those in which the action
«>/ the verb is confined to the subject ; as. No pusikou^
I aUmd up; Pim$hkow^ ho paddlea.
The root of the vorb is obtam^ ftom \>\^ ^vc\

42

TIIK VERO.

perHon singular of tho indicative mood, prosout tense,
by throwing olTtho conjugational termination; thus,

Fasiko, lie stands up. Boot Paall'.

l^mishkow,
Upew,

lie stands up,
He paddles.
He sits,

PmisJik,
Up.

There are seven Conjugations, knoAvn by the third
person just alluded to.

1. Kods in e%v, as Up-ew.

2

ow, „

Nip-ow.

;j!

mi, „

l^imot-uu.

4.

o, „

Kit-o.

5.

<JW, „

Ach-ew.

Vk

urn, „

Itulit-um.

7.

in, „

Tukosh-in.

For the other persons affix to tho root —

For the Singular,

Up-in, 1st and 2nd person.

Xip-an,

PimOt-an,

Kit-on.

Acli-cn.

I tt11it-<1n,

Tukosh-inin.

1. m,

2. an,

3. an,

4. on,
*>. en,
0. an,
7. inin.

as

t«

»♦

»»

»♦

J'or the PluraL
1st (1 and 3). 1st (1 and 2). 2nd.

^

1. man,

2. anan,

3. anan,

4. onan,

5. enan,

6. anan,

7. ininan,

manow,
ananow,
ananow,
onanow,
enanow,
ananow,

inowow,
anowow,
anowow,
onowow,
enowow,
Anowow^

3rd.
e\^n2k.
owuk.
awuk.
owuk.
owuk.
um?insJs.«

THE VEUD. 43

To tbc root now prefix, for the first and second
persons, the initial i)ortion8 of the personal pronouns*
and the persons are complete ; thus,

Ne nipan, I sleep.

Kct achenanow. We (I and 2) move.

Kc tukoshininowow. You arrive.

For the third person possessive animate (his him,
etc.) singular and plural, add iliwa to the root.
Ilxioa in modified thus in the various conjugations:
2nd, aliica; 3rd, dliwa; 4th, olitca; 5th, eltwa;
0th, iliwa; 7th, iliiea.

For inanimate add makun to the root for the singu-
lar, and mahmtea for the plural, with a connecting
vowel : 1st Con. e; 2nd, a; 3rd, ii ; 4th, o; 5th, e;
(Uh, o ; 7th, o ; as.

An. Tukoshin. Inan. Tukoshin-omoibttJi.

For third person possessive inanimate (his it,
etc.) add to the inanimate form just given, for the
singular tieir, for the plural iliwa ; as.

Tukoshinomakun-t2rtr, His it arrives.

„ 'iliwa^ His them arrive.

Observe that in the sixth and seventh conjuga-
tions these affixes are made, not to the root, but to
the full third person singular :

Itfilitum-^imaJcun, > It thinks.

„ -ilew. His it thinks.

-iliwa, His them think.

In verba ending in tscw, aa P\mal.\%c«>V^^vis»^

the inanimaU is generally foTmeaL>BS ^^^^^^tlr'vt.
«^^ and aiBxing the paxticVo uti ; tw^ Pxf^v-ut.. vw

44

TBE VERB.

lives; and to this the other terminations ai-o to bo
added.

In verbs ending^ in shin, as PimushiH^ he lies down,
tlio inanimate is generally formed by changing the
sb into t ; as, Pmttin^ it lies down.

TnK Terminations for the Subjunctive Mooik

iRt.

1. cyan,

2. ayan,
•3. uyan,
4. oyan,
Ik cyan,

6. uman,

7. ineyan.

Present Tense.

Singular.

2nd.

oyun,

aynn,

iiynn,

oyun,

oyun,

umun,

ineyun.

Plnml.
lst(1 and.'t). l6t(l and 2).

1. cyak,

2. ayak,

3. ayak,

4. oyak,
.*». cyak,
(>. uinak,
7. incyak,

oyuk,

aynk,

aiyuk,

oyuk,

cyuk,

nmuk,

inejuk.

2na.
oyak,
ayak,
ayak,
oyuk,
cyak,
umak,
ineyAk,

;hxl.
it.
at.
at.
ot.
ct.
Ilk.
ik.

:Srd.
i(t)cliik.
acliik.
ucliik.
ochik.
echik.
ukik.
ikik.

In the seventh conjugation the termination is
;<enerally contracted; thus, Tidcetkva/t^a^ "Ws^x^m^
THkcMnan^ etc.
In the inanimate malum \)ccom«ik wik\\fe ^'^^ *^^
^ingulnr^ and Malrimica, vuibike tot ^^ ^w^

V*.

TIIK VEltB.

4J

No luilwulotuu u ko tukoshinomakuh moBinahikun,
I mil «;lad that tho packet has come.

In tho thinl person poesessivo animate iUwa
1>ccumc8 Hit or tUche; as, Ne michilawilsin H alum"
lichc okosiHi, I am sorrj that his son is sick.

in tho inanimate tleie becomes ilik for tho singular,
and t7iira, Hike for the plural; as, Kunawapatum
ri82>ichc milonakwHnilike o musinahikuna, see how
beautiful his books appear.

I now give a verb of tho second conjugation in
full.

Niix>w, He sleeps.

Indicative Mood.
Pre§ent TeH9e. No nipan, I sleep.

1.

3. An.
Inan.
Puss. An.

Singular.

Ne nipan,

Ke nipan,

Nipow,

Nipamakun,

Nipaliwa,

Inan. Nipamakunilew,

I sleep.
Thou slcepest.
Ho sleeps.
It sleeps.
His him sleeps.
His it sleeps.

1. (1 and 3)
1. n and 2)

o

3. An.
Inan,
Poes. An.

99

Inan.

Plural.

Ne nipanan,
Ko nipananow,
Ke nipanowow,
Nipowuk,
jNipamakunwa,
Nipaliwa,

Wo sleep.
We sleep.
You sleep.
They sleep.

B\% ^QOi or ^<»x
Do.

4«l TUE VEnB,

PoMi Tense. I slept, was 8leox)ing, or did aloop*.

iSingular.

1. Nc nipatr, I slept.

2. Ko nipatr. Thou didst sleep.
*j. An. O nipatr, He idept.

Inan. Nipnniakunopun, It slept,

i^ess. An. Niimlcpun, Ilis him slept.

„ Inan. Ni])amakunilepun, His it slept.

riural.

1.(1 and 3 ) Ne niimtanan, We slept.

1. (1 and 2) Ke nipatananow, Wo slept.

2. Ke nipatowow. You slept.

3. An. nipatownk, They slept
Inan. Kipamaknnoptma, Do.

PoBS. An. NiiMtlepun, His them, etc.,

slept.
,, Inan. Xi^ianialninilepuna, Do.

Auotker Past Teuse,

Singular.

1 . Xe nipan-apun, I was sleeping.

2. Ke nipan-apun. Thou, etc
:;. Nipa-pun.

Other rcrsons as in the former Tense.

Plural.

;. /I and S) Ne mpaxifiOi-ai^xm^ ^Ht^^^s^^ii^^ffs^^-
i. ( i and 2) Ke nipanfloi-a^xm^ ^

•• Ko nipaxiQiw-MiasL^ X^ ^^«^

Perfect Tetue. I Iwivo slept
Singular.
!• N'o ko nijian, I Iiave slept.

-• Ka ko nipan. Thou host alopt.

'■i. An. Ko nipow. He hoa alept.

Inan. Ke niputnaknn. It boa alept, eto.

Von. An. Ko nipaliwa.
,, loan. Ko nipatnokunilow.

Plural.

I. (1 anil 3) No ko ni[ianan.

1. (1 and 3) Ko.ko nipananow.

-. Ko ko tiipanowow.

a. An. Ko iiiiHiwuk.

Inao. Ke nipamakunwa.

Poaa. An. Ko nijialiwa.

„ Inan. Ke nipamnkuniliwa.

PUparfeet Teuie. I had slept
Singular.
!■ Xe ke nipatl.

^> Jve ko nipatl.

-'t. An. O ke nipatl.

Inon. Ke nipamaknnopun. « -

Poaa. An. Ko nipalopun.
„ Inan. Ko nipainakanilopnn.
llanL
1. (1 and U) Ke ko nipatanan.
1. (1 and 2) Ke ko nipatonanuw.
" Ka ke iiipatowo>pr.

O ko nipatowuV.
Xe nipamakuno^Txa.

A An.
Jaaa.

I- An. Ke nijtalepun.

48 THK VKUB.

Another Pluperfect I had been sleeping.

Singular.

1. No ko nipan-apun.

Ko ko nipan-apun.
Ko nipa-pun.

< ULcr Persons as in the former Tense*

Plural.

1.(1 au«l .*> ) No ko nipanan-apnn.

1. (I and 2) Ko ko nipanan-apun.

2. Kc ko nipanow-apnn.

3. Ko nipa-punnk.

Another TJurd Permm.

An. Sing. Ko nipa-ko]mn.
,, PI. Ko nipa-wakopun.

FntHrr Tetue, I shall sleep.
Singular.

1. No ka nipan.

2. Ko ka nijmn.
•». An. * Kutta nipow.

Iiian. Kutta nipamakun.

Pofis. An. ^ Kutta nipaliwa.

Inan. Kntta ni|>amakunelew.

Plural.

1. (1 and 3) No ka nipanan.

1. (I txml 2) Ko ka nipananow.

2. Ko ka nipanowow.
o. All. Kullsw Ti\\>Qr«\ik.

Intm. Kutta ii\\uw\s^s^>\\^«^*

PoH8. An. KnUa xiVpaAvwiu
.. Inan. Kutta u\vaxaaV>«S&^

THE VERB.

40

1.
2.

a.

An.

Inan.
Po68. An.

Second Future. I shall have alept.
Singula)'.

No ka ke nipatr. ^

Ke ka ke nipatr.
O ka ke nipatr, or
Kntta ke nipapun.
Kutta ke nipamakunopun.
Kutta ke nipalepun.

»♦

1. (1 and 3)
1.(1

and 2)

3. An.
Inan.
PosB. An.

Inan. Kutta ke nipamukunilepun.

Plural.

No ka ko nipatanan.
Ko ka ke nipatananow.
Ko ka ko nipatowow.
Kutta ko nipatowuk.
Kntta ke nipamakuuopuna.
Kutta ke nipalepun.

»»

Inan. Kutta ke nipamakunilepuna.

It will be unnecessary to go through the tenses of
the Potential Mood, as all are formed like those
already given, the only difference being in the
particles placed before the verbal root.

No wo nipan.
No ge nipan,
Ne KO we nipan,
No ka we nipan,
Ne ka ge nipan,
Ne we nipati,
Ne ka nipati,
3> Jta go nipatr
Jfe ka ko nipt^tX,

I wish to sleep.

I can sleep.

I have wished to sleep.

I shall wish to sleep.

I shall be able to sleep.

I wished to sleep.

I should sleep.

I ootA& \iv9« ^«^\»«

50 THE VERB.

Imprrative Mood.
PrcMent Tense.

Singular.

. 2. Nipa, Sleep thou.

3. An. Akosho kutta ni- Let nim aleep.

- pow,
Inan. Akosho kutta ni- Let it sloep.

_ pamakuuy
Fobs. An. Akoshe kutta ni- Let his him sleep.
_ paliwa,
„ Inan. Akosho kutta ni- Let his it sleep,
pamakunilew.

Plural.

1.(1 and 2) Nipatow, Let us sleep.

2. Nipak, Sloep ye.

•*(. An. Akosho kutta ni- Let them sleep.

_ powuky
Inan. Akoshe kutta ni- Let them sleep.

_ pamakunMra,
Poss. An. Akosho kutta ni- Let his them sleep.
_ paliwa,
^ Inan. Akoshe kutta ni- Do.

pamakuniliwa.

Future Terue.
Singular.
2. Xipa-kun, Sleep thou.

PluraL
1(1 and 2) Nipa-k, \aK ^qa iiis^^%

The other penmia mo ibe iioiko m «ft»ft ^'^ '^^
^MmertenBO.

THE VERB. 51

SupposiTivK Mood.

Tho sign of the Suppoeitive Hood is oUAd^ or
otoio, and may be attached to any of the penoni in
the indicative and potential mooda. In the jpast
tense and thoae formed from it» the auppontiTe
partide undergoes a grciit change.

Pre$etU Ten^e. I am asleep, I suppose, or I must be

asleep.

Singukr.

1. Ne nipan-atoka.

2. Ko uipau-atoka.

3. An. Nip-atoka.

Inan. \ipamakun-otoka.

Poss. An. Kipal-etoku.
,9 Inan. Nipamakunil-etok&.

mural.

1. (1 and 3) Ne nipanan-atoka.

1. (1 and 2) Ke nipanan-atoka.

2. Ke nipanow-atok&.
.3. An. Nip-atoka-nuk.

Inan. Nipamakun-otoka-na.

Poes. An. Nipal-etoka.
„ Inan. Nipamakun.

Ne ka nipan-atoko, I shall sleep, I suppose.

Ne we nipan-atokA, I wish to sleep, I suppose*

etc.

Pati Teme. I was asleep, I suppose.

Singular.

L No uipan-ttkopuii.

^' Ke nipau-Qikop^Kii.

^» An, Nip-a!kopnB9u

1.(1

52 THE VERD.

3. Po68. An. Nipal-ikopunu.

„ Inan. Nipamakunil-ekopun.

rinral.

and 3^ No nipanan-akopun.
and 2) Ko nipanan-akopun.

2. Ke nipanow-akopun.

3. An. Nipow-akopunu.
Inan. Niimmakunwa-kopun.
Toss. An. Nipal-ikopunu.

„ Inan. Nipamakunil-okopunwa.

No ko nipan-akopun, I had been asleep, I Bup

pose.
Ne ka ke nipan-akopun, I might Lavo been asleep,

I suppose.

SuBJUNXTivE Mood.

Hero let nio remind the student that in (this
mood he has no personal pronouns to assist him, the
persons being expressed by the inflected terminations.

Present TeMe.

Singular.

1. Nip-ayan, Qf) I sleep.

2. Nip-ayun, Thou sleep.

3. An. Nip-at, He sleep. ^
Inan. Nip-amakuk, It sleep.^'^.
Poss. An. Nip-aliche, His him sleep.

,. Inan. Nip-amakun-ilik, His it sleep.

Plural.

1. (1 and 3) Nip-ayak, We sleep.

1. (1 and 2) Nip-ayuk, I^i.

2. Nip-ayilk| Xo'a tikfi«^.

8. An. Nip-atKihik, TViW iBLWft*

THE VERB. 58

3. P(M0. An. Nip-alicbo, His them aleep^

„ InaD. Nip-ainaknn-ilik*e, Do.

Past TcHse.

Singular.

1. Nip-aya-pan, (If) I slept.

2. Nip-aya-pun, Thou slept.

3. ^\ji. Nip-as-pun, He slept.
Inau. Nip-amakuk-opun, It slept.
Poss. An. Nip-alis-pun, His hun AegL

„ Inan. Nip-amukun-elik-opun.His it slept.

Plural.

1. n and 3^ Nip-ayak-opun, We slept.

1. (1 and 2) Nip-ayuk-opun, Do.

2. Nip-ayak-opun, You slept.

3. An. Nip-awas-pun, They slept.
Inan. Ni;)amakun-owakopunft, Do.

Poss. An. Nip-aliwaff-pun, His them slept.

,, Inan. Nipamakuu-elik-owa- Do.

kopuna.

Perfect Ten$e. (If) I have slept.

This tense is formed like the present^ the particle
ie being prefixed.

Ke nipayan, I have slept^ etc.

The Pluperfect^ in like manner, is formed as the
ixist.

Ee nipayapan, I had slept, etc.

Future Tense. If or when I sleep.
Singular.

/• Nipayaii-&.

^' Nipayun-&«

S. An. Nipat-a.

InMn. Nipamakuk-^

64

THE VERB.

3.

Po6K. An.

Nipalit-H.

„ Inan

. Kipamakunilik*tt.
Plural.

1.

(1 and 3)
(1 and 2)

Nipayak-M.

1.

Nipayuk-u.

2.

Nipayuk-wa.

3.

An.

Nipat-wawa.

Inan.

Nipaniakuk-wawa.

Po68. An.

Nipalit-wawa.

»t

Inan. Nipamakunilik-wawa.

It must bo romcmbored, too, tliat the subjunctive
in U8cd very largely as an affirmative mood, and as
such has a full complement of tenses, all declined
as either the present or the mst already given, with
tlie addition of prefixed particles ; as,

Ako muka ku wunishka- And then they will arise,
chik.

I shall sleep.
I shall be able to sleep.
I shall wish to sleep.
I slept.
I have slept.
I would lueep.
I should be able to sleep.
I had slept or would have
slept.

Also, that the relative particle ha is followed by
the subjunctive, and that ha^ where the action is
future, is changed into lUk ; thwi^^

Ka niiMiyan,
Ka go nipayan,
Ka wo nipayan,
Ka niiKiyan,
Ka ke nipayan,
Ka nipayapan,
Ka go nipayapan,
Ka ke nipayapan.

Xola ia nipavan

Kela ia Ice nipayan, T^ow 'w^ksAsMX ^^'^

Wela i-a ko nipakopima. Ho ^\xo \^ Atf^'^

1 vrViO fJl^-o .

THR VKltB. 65

Flat vowel. I alept, eta

Singular.

1. Nilpayan, I slept.

2. N&payiin, Thou didst sleep.

3. An. Napat, He slept.
Inan. Napamaknk, It slept.
Poss. An. Napalicbe, His bim slept.

,, Inan. Nupamakunilik, His it slept.

Plural.

1. (1 and 3^ N&payak, We slept.

1. (1 and 2) Xa2)a3nik, Do.

2. Napayak, Yon slept.

3. An. Napat-cbik, They slept.
Inan. Napamakoke, l)o.
Poss. An. Ntlpalicbo, His tbem, etc.

n Inan. Napamakunilike, Do.

DuDirATiYE Mood.

Present Tense. If I sloop.

Singular.

1. Napawanu, If I sleep.

2. Napawuna, If thou sleep.

3. An. Napakwa, If be sleep.
Inan. Napamakxmokwa, If it sleep.
Poss. An. Napolikwa, If bis bim sleep.

„ Inan. Napamakunilikw&, If bis it sleep.

Plural.

J. p and 3) Ailpawakwa, 1£ 'w^ Aft«^.

2. (I and 2) JVupawnkwa, '5:^-

^' . JVapawilkwa, It you Ae«vv,

i.ri
1.(1

56 TUE VERB.

3. Inan. Napamakunokwawa, If they sloep.

' Po88. An. Napalikwawu, If his them aleop.

,, Inan. Nupamakunilikwuwa, Do.

Poit Tense, if I slept.
Singular.

1. Napawapana.

2. Napawapiina.

3. An. Napakopuua.
Inan. Napamakunokopuna.
Po88. An. NapalikopuuA.

„ Inan. Naptimakunolikopuna.

riural.

1 and 3) Nalpawakopima.
and 2) Xapawnkopuna.

2. Napawakopuna.

3. An. Kaptiwakopuna.

Inan. Napamakunowakopuna.

Fobs. An. Kapalikowakopuna.
,1 Inan. ^^apaniakunclikowakopuna.

Should a particle be prefixed to the verb, the
vowel is not flattened. As a prefix in this mood
the e in optative we is flattened, thus becoming wa ; as,

Kil ge nipawana. If i weit) able to sleep.

Ka ge uipawapina, I f 1 luid been able to sleep.
Wa nipawana. If I wished to sleep.

Kelative Form.
Present Tense, I sleep in relation to him or them.

SinguUi.
^. Nenipovr-axu \>^fi«^vii>^'^ ^

THE VERB. ^7

Plural.

1. (1 «nd 3^ No nipow-anan. We sleep, etc.

1. (1 and 3} Ko nipow-ananow. Do.

2. Ke 7«ipow-anowaw, You sleep, etc.

3. Nipow-awuk, llioy sleep, eto*

For the perfect tense, prefix Ice to the root of the
verb.

SuiuuNcnvE Mood.
Prtteni Tense. (If) I sleep in relation to him.

Singular.

1. Nipow-uk, I sleep in relation

to him.

2. Nipow-ut, Thou sleep, etc.

3. Nipow-at, lie sleep, etc

riural.

1. ^1 and 3^ Nipow-ukit, We sleep, etc

1. (l and 2) Nipow-uk, Do.

2. Nipow-&k, You sleep, etc

3. Nipow-achik, They sleep, etc

Indetermiuate Penon,
InmcATiVK Mood.

Preeent Tense.

Nipanewun, People are sleeping.

Bah NipanewnnileWi Do. in relation to others.

Past Tenu.
7? t ^^/^^'^n-opun, * People ^w^.^^j'^^^^

58 TIIK V£UB.

SUBJUXCTIVK M001>.

Preient Tense.

Nipanowuk, Peoplo are sleeping.

Bel. Nipanewunelik, Do. in relation, eto.

Pa9t Tense,

Nipanewnk-opun, Peoplo were sleeping.
Kcl. Nipanewimilik-opun, Do. in relation, eto.

NoTK. — ^In this verb the o which precedes «?, fol-
lowed by a vowel, should be pronounced a ; as. No
nipowon, Ne nipriwan. The o is used throughout to
preserve the symmctrv^ of the verb, and to prevent
confusion to the eye of the student.

We have now mudo some progress in our verb
Nipatv^ but have by no means finished %vith it yet.
AVo have the verb in the abstmct, we must yet
examine it in its modified forms ; for how can wo
tell, from what wo have already scon, whether our
subject slept much or little, constantly or only occa-
sionally, or whether he only feigned sleep after all ?
Our verb must tell us all these ^larticulars.

IVIohlFICATIOXS OP TUK VkBD,

The verb is modified as to manner, place, augmen-
tation, diminution, iteration, and simulation.

JfaiiNer and Place.

Manner and place aio V>l\i crwswfift. Vj "^^ ^
tide iski or ii. In Homo caMs lYi^ ^gKi!^^^ ^^
^^ ▼©rb; as, lahi nipow, lie Awg^ «. ^

THE VERB.

59

l)1aco : in others it displaces the first portion of the
abstract verb ; as.

Kitot&o,

liotaOf

lililw-atisew,

Milo-twow,

Ho goes off.

He |j;oc8 to a certain place.

He is of a good disposition.

He is of such a disposition.

He is good.

Ho is so, morally.

In this ca^ the modified verb is of the same oon«
jagation as that of the abstract verb.

AugiHentatian.

There is a verbal particle, tkaw^ signifving abnn-
ilanco, ;irhich will come under our notice bj-and-bj,
and it is a derivaiive from this, tkcie^ which supplies
the augment in intransitivo verbs; as.

Pimotuo,
Pimotd'Mkew^
Nipow,
Nipd-skeWt

He walks.

Ho walks much.

He sleeps.

Ho sleeps much.

You observe that the termination is different finom
that of Nipow, being cw, which indicates another
conjngation ; and as the first person ends in tn, by
refcrriug to the table this verb will be found to l>e
of Mio first conjugation.

Diminution.

Diminutive nouns, as we have already seen, end
jh M or s/itWi; diminutive \cf\» exidi Va ^ ^s&.\!ax
laanner with tbo tormination shew ; aa.

He dxvafca.

Ho dtuikm «.UX»ft.

MinekwOd,

60

TB£ VERB.

Nipow, Ho sleeps.

Nipd'tlhcto^ Ho sleeps a little.

This, too, is of the first conjugation.

Ileraiion,

Tliis gives au occasional and distributive expres-
sion to the verb, and is produced by the reduplica-
tion of tho first syllable, which frequently assumes
a flattened form ; as.

Pimotao,
Pa-pi motao,

T-ui>ew,

Minekwau,

Ma-miuekwuo,

«Siko,

Su-siko,

Melewuo,

Mu-melewa6,

Ma-iuelewru>,

Nipow,

Na-nipow,

Na-nipashew,

Na-nipuskew,

He walks.

He walks aboiit.

Ho sits.

Ho Kits about.

He drinks.

He drinks occasionally.

He spits.

He spits about.

Ho gives.

Ho gives occasionally.

Ho gives distributively.

Ho sleeps.

Ho sleeps now and then.

He sleeps a little now

and then.
He sleeps a great deal

now and then.

The iterative particle, being a prefix and not an
uffix, produces no change of conjugation, as was the
4;ase with the augmentative and diminutive particles.

SivMilaiion.
The simulative noun, oa yovi viV^X T«tMStD^5«t^«o^^
In Ian; the simulative veri) oxi^» Vu Vo*o ; ^^^^

THE VEIUI.

61

Kikumo,

Nikumo-kaso,

Ayumo-w,

Ayumo-kaso,

Nipo-w,

Nipa-kaso,

IIo Bings.

lie pretends to sing.

He speaks.

Ho pretends to speiik.

He sleeps.

He pretends to sleep.

By referring to the table it will bo found that
the simulative verb is of the fourth oonjugation.

I will now give the present tense of the indicativo
and subjunctive moods of Nipuskew and Nipakaso,
as well as of a verb of the seventh conjugation, and
so dose this part of our subject.

Nipaskow, He sleeps much.

Indicative Mood.

Present Tense.

Singular.

Ne nipuskin.
Ke nipaskin.
Nipaslcow.
Niplskanmkun.
Nipuskiliwa.

1.
2.
8. An.

Inan.

Pees. An.

„ Inan. Nipuskamakunilew.

Plural.

1. (1 and 3^ No nipiiskinan.
1. (1 and 2) Ke nipaskinanow.
• 2. Ke nip&skinowow.

S, An, Nipuskewuk.

JOoAD. NipOskamakuinfa.
I^cet. An. NipilskiUwa.
ff Inmn. Nip&skamakaBiViw^

62 TUE VKRB.

Subjunctive Mood.
Present Tense, (If) I sleep mnoh

Singular.

1. Nipuskeyan.

2. Nipaskcyun.

3. Au. Xipuskit.
Inun. Nipuskamakuk.
Po88. An. Nipaskilicbe.

„ Inan. Nipaskamakunilik.

Plural.

1. (1 and 3^ Nipaskcyak.

1. (1 and 2) Niposkeyuk.

2. Nip&skeyak.

3. An. Nipaskitchik.
Inan. Nipaskaroakuke.
Po88. An. Nipaskilicbe.

^ Inan. Nipaskamakunilike.

Nipakaso, he pretends to sleep.

Indicative Mood.

Preicnt Teme.

Singular.

1. Xe nipakason.

2. Ee nipakason.

3. An. Nipakaso.
Inan. Nipakasomaknn.
Poss. An.* Nipakasoliwa.

1. (1 and a'i 'S^ Ti\^w»Tk«i-
1. (1 ond V) ¥Le Ti\\yiwV%aOT^w^^^

THE VtRB. 63

2. Ko nipakosonowow.

^ An. Nipakasowuk.

Inan. Nipakasomaknnwa.

Pom. As. Nipakanoliwa.
,, Inan. Nipakasomakoniliw*.

Subjunctive Mood.
PrefeiU Te^e. (If) I pretend to aloep.

Singular.

1. Nipakaaoyan.

2. NipakaaojTun.

3. An. Nipakasot.
Inan. Nipakasomakuk.
Pom. An. Nipakasoliofae.

^ Inan. Kipakaaomaknnilike,

Verb of ike Seventh OmjuigaUom.
Pimiflhin, ho lies down.

Indicative >Iood.
Present Tente*

Singular.

1. Ne pimish-inin.

2. Ee )>imi8li-inin.

3. An. Pimish-in.
Inan. Pimit-iu and

l^miah-in-omaknu.
Jima, An. Pimish-in-iliwa.
„ Inan. Piuiit-in*ilow and

L-in-omikuii iWr*

«4

i- and 2) ^® P'n»'«h.,v;„

THE VKRB.

65

ExampUi of the Varioui ComjugatiUm».
Indigatiye Mood.

Naspicli ne milwdleidn &

patumwnk Eichemu-

neto ot ayumewin &

ayumetanewiinelik,
Ne pelokdnaj^n nekenak

makwach &te petokiU-

pun nekawe,
Ililewuk ke tukoshinwuk

otakoshSk, a piitaohik

mdchut ayowina ka ke

nipatachik p1iK)onelik,
Ashi ke Idtoidpunuk ispo

tukoshinilioae onene

ililewa,
Kntta eikeldeeumk wapu-

matwawa ayumeawe-

kimowa,
Afihl ne I^ 1:0 wuniehkad

paumoshe nokosit pe-

sim,
Wepuch ne ka kowUhimon

naspich & ay&skoseyan,
K&yapuch na pimatieew

kekofiis?

I am very glad when I
hear God's Word read.

I was entering onr honso
as my mother entered
it.

Indians came in yester-
day, bringing many
furs, which they killed
in the winter.

They had already «mo
off when those Incnans
came in.

They will bo glad when
they see the minister.

I shall have already risen
before the sun

I shall soon go to bed, as

I am very tired.
Is thy son still alive?

PoTEMTiAL Mood.

Nnmawela ne ge nOtimafi
aDoch a kekeshilpayak,
Jfainawela ne ka ge tioian

gfti Wg Wftl m mi Ir^ V naS-

piob 4 akD0e jan.

I cannot sing this mom-

GG

THE VERB.

Ke ka ge nisctotanowno

luiloachemowin uyiime-

tanewuka,
Mosbuk tapwA ke ka peio-

kad ayumeawekuiai-

kok u Ayumctikeshi-

kak,
Kutta ke sakUepumJc

kitche kishowahaohik

Kichomunotowa,
Kutta ge aputi^ewuk na

unoch?

You will bo able to
understand the Gospel
when it is read.

Truly thou shouldst al-
ways enter the ehurch
on the praying day.

They would have been
afraid to mako God
angry.

Will they be able to
work now ?

Subjunctive Mood.

Mthpimatitcyand wapuka
ne ka tukoshinin,

Pmatlheifuna wepuch
unta ke ka mishukan,

NukayoBheifakwa n&shta
kmcwunUheifakwa^ tap-
wu ke ka kitenialdsino-
wow,

Ke$hepulitteaiDd wepuch
kutta nukuwawuK o
wechuwakunewawa,

If I am well to-morxow,

I will come.
If you (sing.) sail, you

will soon arrive there.
Should you have foul

wind and rain, yon will

bo truly nuserablo.

If they move rapidly,
they will soon meet
(by water) their
friends.

Subjunctive a$ Affirmative.

Wepuoh ne ka keshetan, I shall soon finish it, and
_ ako maka kd kewdyan^ then I will return.*

Alokok nochetak ke xnu* Ia^*^ %X ^cs^ozl \«tf^«3^
sjnaiiikiuiewawa, iko ^t\i %. ^wm^ %sA. ^^
wepuch id maeteisiiiiir ^mXi wc^ti w»«F^J^^

THK VERB.

67

Tanta iitat keshem?

E&keBbap ke meshnkow,
ke pfiahnwao maka
mecMt ncska ka ke
nipahat, ako maka
mena peotU^

Eo ayaakosew ispe tahh
$hik^ ke meduflOy &ko
keshach nApat,

Where is thy younger
brother?

He arrived (by water) this
morning, and brought
man}^ geese that he had
killed, and then went
off again.

He was tired when he
came, he partook of food,
and at onoe fell asleep.

Imp£eati7£ Mood.

KeshachixMe,

Itapik^

Keshach latotdtaWf

Ke meohisoyiin& nochi-

mik itothkuu kitche

munit&yon,
Kowishimok,

Embark at onoe (sing.).
Look there (pL).
Lot us depart at onoe.
When thou hast eaten, go

into the woods to ooUect

firewood.
Go to bed (pL).

SuFFosmvE Mood.

Ashi kakoietokanuk^ They are probably awake

already.
Wepuchmenafi€l»<tiio- We shall probably oome
MfUnan atokd^ again soon.

DuBrrATivs Mood.
Xeshpin ndpahod kutta If he sleep he will be welL

JCeahpin idsitawesewdkwH Ifyouax^ViAxu^Xxiss^l^s^
wepncb ke ktk kiskAle- '^inJl iwotl \DBsm t*«
ti^owow ke miuinmlii- \Mok»*

68 THE VERB.

Kumawola ne kiskuleUn I don't know whether they

ha pimatisewakwa^ will live or not.

Nnniawola no kiskuletun I don*t know whether I

Ira jXMetoancf , shall go off or not.

Belative.

Ne ke peiokmcan wokelik, I entered his tent.

No ko nutawapumow, I wont to see him, and

iikota maka wekelik slept there in his tent.

napowuk,

NekapimotawanomSaikvL' I will walk in his path

nalik otituhumtcukd^ when I reach it.

Ke kiskinohnmakawe- When I shall have been

wana ne ka kitkiMewam taught, I will remember

o kukiiskw&vrina, his oommandments.

Ne ka po§ewan o chconani- I will embark in his

lik, canoe.

POSSBBSIYE.

Akonltwa okosisa. His son is siok.

Ke nutnwapnmauotanisa He went to see his dangh-

ka akosihche^ ter who is siok.

mokoman nlispich mt- His knife is vezy large.
Mhalew^

Kiohemuneto ot aynme* Gk>d's word is very power-
win naspich safcoitfe- fnl.
makunelew^

O waskahikunim naspich His house is Tezy high.
MpaleWf

Verbal M.oi>in.ckTvm%«

NumaweU ne ge tapw&r 1 cKMaotXjf^w^'^^

THE VERB.

60

All; anhs pimot&Mkew^

Ke milokwamin na?
Numawola ; ne itaiupd-

«^tfi piko,
No ke pupamoian Askuno

koshikak, numa wa-

wacb kukwan maka ne

ko misk&n,
Ke nifekoMO ispe peaohe

natikot onotinekAwa,

Tea ; he already walks a

little.
Do you sleep well ?
No ; I sleep a little now

and then only.
I have been walking about

the whole day, but

nothing whatever have

I found.
He pretended to be dead

when the soldiers came

to him.

VABIETIES OP THE INTBANSITIVE VERB.

Theso varieties are— 1. Verbalized Nouns; 2.
Numeral Verbs; 3. Adjective Verbs; 4. Accidental
Verbs ; 5. Beflective Verbs ; 6. Becixnrocal Verbs ;
7. Indefinite Verbs ; 8. Passive Verbs.

The last four varieties will be considered after
the Transitive Verb, as they are all derived from it;
for instance, Beflective, Ne sakehittison, I love my-
self; Beciprocal, Ne sakehittonan, we love each
other ; Indefinite, Ne sakehewan, I love some one ;
Ne sakehikowin, I am loved by some one ; Passive,
Ne makopison, I am tied up, bound.

Verbauzed Nouhs.

Verbalized Nouns are of two kinds ; 1st. That in
trh/ab the noun reoeives only % v^rbil termination ;
^ud. TbMt in which it receiyes Tao^ s^ ^c^^ «^^ ^
terminAtion. In both case* ike ucwai iwtwteawk

^deigoe§ contraction.

70

THE VERB.

i. Nouns With a Verbal Termination.

1. Tho oxistence or oondition of the notm is
affirmed. Animate termination, wew; inanimate, ewun.

Animate.

A man.

He is a man.

A woman.

She is a woman.

Clay.

He is day.

This form is of tho first conjugation, and is thus
declined in tho indicative mood, present tense :

Singular.

1. Ne napVwin,

2. Ke napu-win,

3. Napii-wew,
Poss. An. Xapo-wiliwa,

Napuo,

Napu-wow,

Iskwtld,

Iskwtt-wow,

Ushislike,

XTshisko-wew,

riural.

in-an,
and 2) Ke nap&-win-anow,

I am a man.
Thou art a man.
He is a man.
His him is a
man.

1 (1 and «*)) Xe napVwin-an,

1(1

We are men.

Do.
Tou are men.
They are men.
His them are

men.

This is subject to the simulative change; as.

2. Ko napa-win-owow,

8. Napa-wo-wuk,

Poss. An. Napa-wiliwa,

Napa-wew,
Napft-kaso,
Okima-wew,
OkimB-kaaOf

£fc&emiiiieto-wew,
£ia&62Qaiieto*lcaao,

He is a man.

He pretenda tA Vy^

He la Q[<A. ^ ,^^j.

THE VSRB.

71

Inanimaie.

Cheman,

Cbeman-ewun (sing.),
Cheman-ewnn-wa (pi.)*
Chikahikun,
Chikabikun-ewun (sing.).

A canoe.
It is a canoe.
They are canoes.
An axe.
It is an axe.

Chikahikun-ewnn-wa (pL)* They are axes.

2. The making of what is represented by the
nonn. The termination is k&o ; as,

Paskiseknn,

Paskisekun-ekAo,

Alupe,

Alupe-kao,

Musinahiktinapo,

Mnsinahikunapo-kfio,

A gun.

He makes guns.

A net.

He makes nets.

Ink.

He makes ink.

This termination likewise, in some instances,
expresses that the noun to which it is attached is
used as habitual food by the subject of the verb ; as.

Woyas,
Weyas-ekiio,

Flesh.

Ho is a flesh-eater.

These are verbs of tho third conjugation.

3. The making by means of an instrument or
object. The termination is Adkao; as,

Paskisekun,

Paskisekun-ekak&o,

Mokoman,

Mokoman-ekak&o,

Wuchiston,

fFirc&iifton-ekakfid,

A gun.

He makes a gun with it.

A knife.

He makes a knife with it.

A nest.

He mjakes a neat with it.

TbeBo, too, are of the tbixd ooikyoLtB^^^-

72 THE VERB.

Indigatite Mood.
Preteni Ten$e. I make a knife with it.

Singular.

1. Ne mokoman-ekakan.*

2. Ke mokoman-ekakan.
8. Mokoman-ekakild.

Pos8. An. Mokoman-ckakaliwa.

riural.

1. (1 and «3^ Ne mokoman-ekakan-an.

1. (1 and 2) Ke mokoman-ekakan-anow.

2. Ke mokoman-ekakan-owow.

3. Mokoman-ekaka-wuk.
Posft. An. Mokoman-ekak&liwa.

ii. NauM Verbalized by means of a Prefix and

Terminaiian,

1. Verbs of •• putting on " :

XTstiSy a gloTO. An.

I can 6Ay transitively, PoBtishkowHo ot ustisa, he
puts on his gloves; but the Indian prefers to use
such expressions intransitively, in one word, thus :

Post-ustis-uo, He puts on his gloves.

Post-UHtotin-HOf He puts on his cap.

Post-ukop-iiu, She puts on her dress.

2. Verbs of ** wearing" :

XTsam, a mowshoe. An.

Trans. KikishkowOo ot He wesxa ^Vk vcl<;s^i^^:miu

usatna,
IntnoB. Eik-ffMsi-&5, ,^ %h

THE VERB.

78

TraiiB. Sakishkom ot He wean hii cap.

lutotin,
Intrana. Kik-iato/tn-ao« „ n

3. Verbs of •• taking oflf :

Muskisiny a shoe. Inan.

TranB. Eachekonum o He takes off his shoes.

muskisina,
Intrans. KSLiruskigin-^^ ,, ,,

Trans. Kaohekonao ot He takes off his gloves.

ustifia,
Intrans. E&t-tw/t9-&d, ,, h

4. Verbs of " cleansing" : —

Olaknn, a bason. Inan.
Michicho, a hand. Inan.

Trans. Easenumolakn- He cleanses the bason.

nilew,
Intrans. Kasen-e^dbcn-ao, ^ »,

Trans. Kasennm ochi- He deanses his hands.

cheya,
Intrans. KaaMiech-aOf ,, ^

5. Verbs of *• visiting " :

Ulupe, a net An.

Trans. Natmi nlupeya, He visits the nets.
Intrans. Kat-uiup-iid, ,, „

Trans. Natum waska- Ho goes to the honse.

hikunilew,
Intrans. Nache-ira«l:dU-

kun-SM^

««

19

6. Verbs of ** searching " :

Umisk, a beavex.
Wapusk, a wbite \»ax.

74 THE VERB.

Trans. Nantawaptunod He soarches for beaver.

umiskwa*
Intrans. Nantawa-fMwXrio- „ „

Nantawa-j>tt«2;tr- He searches for white
uo, bears.

7. Verbs of '* feeding on/' the noun being the object :

Niska, a goose.

Trans. MowAo niska. He cats geese.

Intrans. Mo-<^*-rto, „ „

Mo-mtVilir-riu, He eats beaver.

These verbs likewise are of the third conjugation.

8. Verbs with reference to a child :

Owashishy a child.

Trans. Wapummi ot She sees her child.

owashimisha,
Intrans. Wapum-oiro-so,

»» »f

This 'ntransitivo verb is used only in reference
to a woman who is either oxx)ectiDg to be, or who
has lately been confined.

Ashi wapumowttsOf Already she sees her

child, is delivered of it.
Trans. Ayowuu owashi- She has a child, it being

sha il kunosh- within her.

kawat,
Intrans. Kunoskut-otm-so, She is with child.
Trans. Kunawuliinao She takes care of a child

owashisha, w children.

Intrans. Kunawalim-owti-so, «« >>

Tbe&e are verba of ike ioTotioL wuVi^^^sc^^

THE VIBB. 75'

f

\
I

«

I

I

I
t

f

f

There are other verbalized nouns, 8ome of which • *
will oome under notice with the adjective verbs : in \

many the noun is so contracted that it is almost
impossible to discover it at all; those I have ex-
hibited are in constant use. The only other verb I
shall give of this description is that which signifies
•* possession.**

In this verb, nnliko those lately considered, no
part whatever of the transitive verb is introduced,
as indeed there is a difference of signification between
the two verbs, although the distinction is, in practice,
not always observed.

The transitive verb expresses the idea of ** having
temporarily ; " the intransitive, of ** possessing per-
manently."

Trans. Net ayan musi- I have a book.

nahikun,
Intrans. Net o-mtmnoAJ- I possess a book.

Aiin-in,

The prefix of this verb is o or ot ; itsafix eto, with
the possessive particle m sometimes introduced be*
tweon the noun and the verbal termination.

1. With the possessive particle im —

O-waskahikun-tm-ew, Ho possesses a house.

0-mechim-tm-ew, He possesses food.

0-monishapo-m-ew, He possesses wine.

2. Without the possessive particle im —

0-chikahikun-ew, He possesses an axe.

0-mokoman-ew, He possesses a knife.

Okosis-ew, He has a son.

Otaw-ew, He has a father.

Okaw-ew, He liaa Sb mo^iMEc*

70 THE VERB.

3. With tbo possessive particle im placed before a
diminutiTo termination ; as,

Ot-owash-fm-ish-ew (as He possesses children,
at Moose Factory),

These verbs are of the first conjugation, and are
thus declined in the ]>resent tense of the indicative
and subjunctive moods :

Indicative Mood.
Present Tense, I have children.

Singular.

1. Net ot-owashimish-in,

2. Ket ot-owashimish-in.

3. Ot-owashimish-ew.
Fobs. An. Ot-owashimish-iwiliwa.

PJural.

1. ^1 and 3) Net ot-owasbimish-inan.

1. (1 and 2) Ket ot-owashimish-inanow.

2. Ket ot-owasbimisb-inowow.

3. Ot-owashimisb-ewuk.
Poss. An. Ot-owasbimisb-iwiliwa.

Subjunctive Mood.
Present Tense, (If) I have children.

Singular.

1. Ot-owasbimish-eyan.

2. Ot-owasbimisb-eyun.

3. Ot-owashimisb-\t«

Poss. An. nt^wa^V\Tyv\^VvA-ir\Vfatv^

Tin VERB.

Plural.

1. (1 and 3^ Ot-owashimish-eyak.

1. (1 aod 2) Ot-owashimish-ejuk.

2. Ot-owashimish-ej&k.

3. Ot-owashimish-itchik.
Po68. An. Ot-owashimish-iwiliche.

Examples of the

Wola Tap&lechik&t Ei-

chemnnetowew,
Pukwuntow ilUeweto ata

a okimakasot,

Net atuwalemow una na-
pashifih a napdkasat^

Nnmawela ke we pimo-
sinatahotinan milo aye-
tewin otche, maka pas-
tumowin otohe, nashta
il Kiehemunetokoioyun
ata & ilileweyun^

Tanispo mena ka kitota-

ynn?
Kekeahapayaka ne ka ki-

totan a we watouneJU-

kunekdtfanf

Waponilika newa kntta
pupukewayanekakao pa-
pnkewayan&kinilew,

CHakoebek widniohan ke
uwfutA au neiaidd pewa*

Foregoing Verht,

He the Lord (he govern-
ing) is God.

He is a man of no con-
Bideration, although he
pretends to be a diief.

I de8})i80 that boy, as he
pretends to be a man.

We wish to stone thee,
not for a good deed« •
but for blasphemy,
and because thou pre-
tendest to be God,
although thou art a
man.

When shalt thou go off
again?

In the morning I shall
go off, as I wish to
make traps here and
there.

To-morrow my wife will
be engaged in making
shirts from shirt-ootton
(calioo).

Yesterday the blaoksmitli

meXal.

.1

I
I

J

\

78

TUE YERD.

Ko nutaAvalcmittin kitcho
jpcstskal'unckakayunomti
munitowukin,

Ne ka ^^^^Mtisan uko ka
wocliuwittan,

Nc klhtstotlnan uka kitche
sckucheyan nistikwan,

Eesbach tie ka katuskisi"
nan naspich u nipe-
wnke,

Tanta Atat kokoeis?

Natulupdd naBpich & we
mconisoyak.

Ne ke momiikwan k&kat
uskimo popooky

Ket otawtn na f
Nutnawela ; w&skuch nu-
ma pimatisew notawe.

Kei omusinahikuntn na?
Numawela anoch net omu"

mnahtkuntn ; ne ke wn-

netan uncma ka ke

moleyim,
Ke milwAletAn na a ot-

owaaliimish-eyun ?
Xe milwuletiln sa & o<-

owaekimish'eyan^ aha-

Jroob maka meoh&twow

A^ffiiirothkadiehikwiik^

I desire you to make a
coat from this cloth.

I will put on my glovos,

then I will accompany

you.
I wear my cap that I

may not bccomo cold

in the head.
I shall take off my shoes

at once, as they are

very wet.
Where is thy son ?
He has gone to look at

the nets, for wo much

wish to eat, (are very

hungry).
I have liyed on beayer

nearly the whole win-
ter.
Hast thou a father?
No ; long since he is not

alive my father, (t.e.

my father died long

ago).
Do you possess a book?
I do not possess a book

now; I have lost the

one you gave me.

Axo you ^lad that you

have children?
Yet, I am glad I hftx^

THE VERB. 79

NuuERAL Verbs.

Numeral Yorbs are conjugated like other intranai-
tive verba, and hare both the animate and in*
animate formii; they are formed b^ adding tha j

Terbal ondinga to the numeral adjeotxyea, whioh in
some cases undergo a slight alteration before thd
termination is added.

P&yukf one. i

An. P&yuko, He is one. I

Inan. P&yukwun, It is one.

This is a verb of the fourth conjugation; tlie
others are of the fifth conjugation.

NeshOf two.

An. Neshe-wuk, They are two.

Inan. Nesh-inwa, Do.

Nisto, three.
An. Niste-wuk, They are three.

Inan. Nist-inwa, Do.

N&d, four.

An. K&we-wuk, They are four.

Inan. N&w-inwa, Do.

Neyalul, five.

An. Neyalule-wuky They are five.

Inan. Neyalul-inwa, Do.

Nekotwas, six.

An. Nekotwache-wuk, They are six.

Inan. Nekotwas-inwa, Do. \.

Neswas, seven.
Ail Jraswaohe-wuk, TVidBj a^t^ iKrv^ok*

I

\

so THE VEBD.

Tananao, eight.

An. YananAwe-wuk, They are eight*
Inan. Yananaw-invray Do.

Shaketat, nine.

An. Shaketaohe-wnk, They are nine.
Inan. Shakotat-inwa, Do.

Metat, ten.

An. Metache-wuk, They are ten.

Inan. Metat-inwa, Do.

Pnynkoshap, eleven.

An. Payukoshape-wnk, They are eleven.
Inan. Paynkoehap-inwa, Do.

Neshitanow, twenty.

An. Kesbitanawa-wnk, They are twenty,
Inan. Neshitanawaw- Do.

unwa,

Mech&t, many.

An. Mechat-ewnky They are many*
Inan. Mechtlt-inwa, or Do.

Mecba-nwa, Do.

Mechat-in, It is much.

Chukuwashish, a few.

An. ChukuwaahiBh- They are few.

ewnk,
Inan. GhnkQwashiah- Do.

inwa,

Here follow the present tttn^oa ol ^<b \\i^<^»^^^
und rubjiinotiTe moodi of ^<^ ^«£^ ^\i^»«^^ "^"^^

THE VERB.

81

1. (1 and 3)

1. (1 and 2)

2.

3. An.

Inan.

Poss. An.

LmicATivE Mood.

Pre9ent Ten$e. We are three.

Plural.

Ne nist-enan.
Ke nist-enanow,
Ko niat-enowow.
Nist-ewuk.
Nist-inwa.
Niat-iliwa.

»»

Inan. Nisi-in-iliwa.

SusjuNCTivE Mood.
Pre$eni Tense, (If) we are three.

]

1. (1 and 3

1. (1 and 2

2.

3. An.

Inan.

Pos8. An.

Nist-eyak.
Nist-eyuk.
Nist-eyak.
Nifit-ichik.
Nist-ike.

Nist-iliche.
„ Inan. Niat-in-ilike.

^Vlien the number is large (and it is quite allow-
able when small), the numeral itself is generally first
given, and then the verb.

An. Itusewuk, They are so many.

Inan. Itutinwa, Bo.

This may be expressed either by the indicatire or
subjunotive mood ; as,

Neyalulwow mitatomita-

now itusewuk,
Neyalulwow mitatomita-
^ now iko iltnsitchik,
Xeyulnlwow mitatomita-
naw iko itutike.

Five times a hundred

they are ; or
Five times a hundred,

that ia the number.
ThibiasnA. *\x»aa«

\

^

\

82

THE VERB.

When numeral verbs are compounded with other
Intransitive verbs, the latter, in most cases, undergo
considerable alteration, a change of root being some-
times made ; ns.

They three sleep together.
Not Nisto-nipowuk, but Nisto-kwamewuk.

They three stand together,
Not Nisto-nipowewuk, but Nisto-kapowewuk.

But in general a contraction of the verb takes
place, the former part of it being cut off; thus,

rimo-tnwuk,

Nisio-totcuk^

U-pewuk,

NisUhipacttk,

J'im-ashowuk,

Nuio4noa8fi€WHk^

Pim^shinwnk,

NiiUhthinicuk^

rim-«lowuk,

NUto-lowuk^

Pimata-kowuk,

NUta-koumk^

Pimepa-townk,

Niitfhtotcuk,

Pima-takaskowuk,

Niiio-takaskiMOMky

U-komowuk,

NiiUhkamawukf

They walk.

They three walk together.

They sit.

They three sit together.

They sail.

They three sail together.

They lie down.

They three lie down to-
gether.

They fly.

They three fly together.

They swim.

Theythree swim together.

They nin.

They three run together.

They walk on the ice.

They three walk together
on the ice.

They (birds) sit on the
water.

They three sit together^

TlIK VERB.

83

Numeral Alternate Verhi.

Thcso aro oxpresaed hj prefixing the iterative
imrticle; thus,

Nesho, Two.

Xa-nesho, Bv twos, or two apiece.

Xa-ncfihotrtwuk, Tnoy walk by twos.

Xa-nistolowuk, They fly by throes.

Na-n&oshinwuk, They lie down by fours.

Number as applied to Mctuhers of the Body^ etc

This is oxpi*c6scd verbally. Take, for instance, the
sentence, IIo has two hands : Ayow, he has ; nesho»
two; michicheya, hands. To speak in this way
would be quite repugnant to the genius of the Cree
language, and would be almost unintelligible. The
Indians use only one word, equivalent to He is two-
handed, Neshu-chich-ao ; or we may say. His hands
are two, Neshiniliwa o ohichoya.

Nesho-sit-ao, He is two-footed.

Nesho-shkeshik-wAo, He is two-eyed.

Nesho-stikwan-Tio, He is two-headed ; xje. he

has two feet, two eyes,

etc.

I

■

I

ft

i
I

I

I

J
I
(
I

Otiier Nmnerical Ejcpressione.

The river has three branches,

Sepe nistinwa a puskastikwuyake.

Hero we have —

1. Sepe, Eiver,

2. Nistinwa (Ind. Mood, They are three,

Inan.),
S. A,

(Sub. ITood),

t

I

84 THK VERD.

Wutikwun, a branch.

Mistik nokotwasotikwninilyoWf
The tree idx it is branched.
The tree has six branches.

In the chapter on Nouns we saw that ope was a
termination signifying line, oord, etc. ; so we have,

Eetochoknn nuwopekuyow.
The violin is four-stringed.

Maniskatik nistwaskomonwa.

The wooden fence throe wooden bara adhere (are

fixed).
The woo<lcn fence has three bars.
Wasl\ in composition, signifies wood.
For two iho word is so contorted as to appesr at
first sight more like seven than two :

Maniskatik nestrashonumwa.
The wooden fence is two-barred.

Tlie cause of the apx>arcnt contortion is the con-
traction of the word ncswoiJcomonwa ; in which net-
wask is contracted from neshowask.

Cheman nistwaskon.
Tlie vessel is three-sticked (masted).

Cheman nawaskon.
The vessel is four-masted.

Cheman nistwapiskow.

The vessel is three-ironed (has three iron masts;
apUk^ in composition, signifying metal, iron).

PayukotAshkunuo, He ia cm!^<CBCi^^«

THE YERB,

85

Nisto-pajukOy
Nttsto-payukoTun,

He is the Three-One.
Thou Trinity.

ExampU» of the Numeral Verb,

Tan aUuUchik keehemuk ?

Neskewuk napushiehuk,

nashtil ndwewuk iakwa-

bhishuk,
Mcchtiteiovk na ililewuk ka

ko lueshukachik otako-

shck?
Ncyalulewuk napawuk, nie^

tcwnJc iskwiiwuk, mt"

cluUewuk nashta owa-

shishuk,

How many are they, thy
yonnger brotheni or
sisten?

There are two \iifiy% and
there are four girls.

Were thoy many Indians
who arrived yesterday ?

They are five men, they
are three women, and
they are many children.

This might have been expressed without verbal-
izing the numerals.

Tane ka ttueUicJtc Jesus o
kiskinohumuwakuna ?

Jesus o kiskinohumuwa-
kuna ueshothap ke tVot-
i/iica,

•Jesus o kiskinohumuwa-
kuna ke ketotulowa il
kiskinohumakulicho cl
naneehilicJie^

Ne ke wapumowuk ne-
misuk a neehaidchik^

Kiskinohumakilwekumi-
Jtok ne ke fnelatenan k&-

Jteabip,

\Vhat was the number of

Jesus* disciples?
Jesus* disciples were

twelve in number.

The disciples of Jesus
went forth to teach,
two and two.

I F'W my elder sisters

walking two together.

At school we were ten in

8C

THE VKRD.

Wa iiainuskasinakosit ili-
low, a ve«ho8itai kitcho
pimot«it, «f ucHhaskesJak'
tttU kitdio wapity a ne-
BhoeMchat kitcho tnko-
uckilt, a otonit kitcbe
avamit, u omitonulo-
chiknnit kitcho mito-
iiulcchikilt, ii otachako-
witkakokakitchopima-
tisit.

How wonderful (in a]>-
pcaranco) is man, hav-
ing two feet that he ma}'
walk, two eyes that lie
may see, two hands
that he may grasp, a
month that he may
speak, a mind that he
may reflect, and a soul
that he may livo for
over.

Adjective Vkriis.

Thcso inti-ansitive verbs are composed of an
adjectival particlo with a verbal ending, derived
generally from %$he^ manner. They have both the
animate and inanimate forms, and are of all conjuga-
tions except the last.

1st Conj. Milotwow, lie is good.

Ho is sick.
IIo is stont-hearted.
Ho is proud.
He is strong.
He is melancholy.

The inanimate forms are somewhat irregukr:

An. ^lish-ikitew. He is big.

Inan. ^lish-ow. It is big.

An. ^Inshkow-isow, Ho is hard, strong.

Inan. Miushkow-ow, It is hard.

Mushkow-isemakun, It is strong.

An. Eosik-wutew, Ho is heavy.

Inan. Eosik-wun, It i& \i<^N^ «

An. ^Topiik-isew, Ho Va ftaX.
loun. iVupiik-ow, It \a ftaX.

2nd

tf

Akosew,

3rd

»»

Soketahuo,

4th

»•

Kistulemo,

oth

»t

Sapcw,
Pekiskatum,

0th

»»

THE VERB.

87

An. Apisheshesli-eWy
Inan. Apishasb-iiif
An. Miloshish-ew,
Inan. Milwash-in,
An. Malat-iseWy
Inan. Malat-nn,
An. Alim-isew,
Inan. Alim-nn,

lie is Bmall.

It is small.

IIo is good (not morally).

It is good rgenorally\

Ho is bad (not morally).

It is bad.

He is austere.

It is difficult.

Adjective verbs may be qualified by tbe senses; thus*

1. By sight. An. -nahmew^ Inan. -ndkwwm.

^lilo-nakosow, He is good looking.

Milo-nakwuu, It is beautiful.

2. By hearing. An. 'iaiosew, Inan. -iakwun.

Milo-takosew, Ho sounds well.

Milo-takwun, It sounds welL

3. By smelling. An. -mahosew, Inan. -makwun,

Milo-makoseWf He smells well.

Milo-makwun, It is fragrant.

4. By taste. An.' -spukosew^ Inan. -tpuhottn.

Milo-spukosewy He tastes welL

Milo-spukwun, It tastes well.

5. By the mind. An. '•aUtaJcoseto^ Inan. -dleiakwun,

Mil-waletakosew, He is considered good.

l^Iil-waletakwun, It is considered good.

To particularize manner, quality, etc. i$he^ it, or
Uhjnsh, so much, becomes the initial part of the
verb, as already spoken of in the article on Manner

and Place.

•

Mish-ikitew, He is big.

It-Udtew, H.^ ia «o b\^«

Muh-ow, It \a \a^.

\

88

THE VEllB.

Isbpisb-ow,

Milo-twow,

Isbo-twow,

It-ulotakosew,

It-alotakwun,

It iB so big.
He is good.

Ho IB BO.

He IB BO conBidered.
It iB BO oonsidered.

Some adjeotive verbB are suBceptible of the dimi*
nutivo form ; as.

MiBbildt-eWy
Mishildt-iBb-eWy

Misb-ow,
MiBb-a-Bbin,

He iB bi^.

He iB biggisb, tolerably

big (aa a obild).
It is big.
It is biggish.

The iterative particle may bo prefixed to adjectiye
verbs in the plural number ; as«

They are big, here and

there.
Do.
They are small, here and

there.

1)0.

Ma-mis]iikotowuk (An.),

Ma-mishowa (Inan.V
I-apisheKhcshewuk (An.),

l-apishashinwa (Inan.),

It %vill bo remembered that different kinds of
nouns have different terminations, cUik^ for instancOy
characterizing articles made of wood. These different
terminations, somewhat modified, enter into the
adjective verb, being placed between the root and
the verbal ending ; as.

Kin-osew (An.),
Kin-wow (Inan.),
Kin-wapisk-isew (An.),
Ein-wapisk-wun (Inan.),
Ein-waBk-OBOW (An.),
iriii.iiraAk.wuD (Inan.),

He is long.

It is long.

He is long ) Bpeaking of

It is long ( iSk^^aX.*

THE VFUB. 89

Kin-wapak-isow (An.\ He is long ) speaking of

Kin-wapak-un (Inan.), It is long ) ropo, etc

Kin-watc-isow ( An.\ He is long ) Bpeaking of

Kin-wak-un (Inan.;» It is long / doth, etc*

Qualified nouns are verbalized ; as,

Wap-istikwan-Ao, He is white-headed.

Wapowy it is white ; Mistikwon, the head.

The above sentence might have been eacpresaed
otherwise, thus : Wapalew ostikwan, it is wmte, hk
head.

Apischi-tt^ao, He is small-footed.

Kino-e^tcA-uu, He is long-handed.

Example* of the Adjective Verb.

Tan dspisliak ko waskahi- How large is your house?

kunim?

Anoch naspich mishow^ It is now very larco, fur

wOsa anocheka no ke I have lately emarged

mishatan, it.

Tan dspidiikUU ketunis ? How big is your daughter?

Ashi nMiikiiisJicw^ tSho is already somewhat

big.

TandepieJiikitiUchekek(mB How big is thy son*s

ot owashimisha ? child ?

Ashlmt«AiX*t<i«7it7tira,pimo- He is already rather big;

tashiliwa maka. and he walks a little.

Observo the two diminutive possessives in this
sentence;

Mishikitishow, He is biggish.

MishikUiikiliwOf His him is biggish.

Pimot&ahew^ H« waVka %^\\A^^.

Pimotd9hiUH>a, . Hu laim vwMa ^>i\As^

90

TIIE VERB.

Eo ke nantawapnmowuk

_ na mistikwuk ?

An; nc ke luiskoTTOwnk

niaka muchat d hmuM"

Mhitichtl\
Kaspich mtutkhoirapUkwun

ko vranchikmi,
An ; mukusew numavola

kutta go pek^vubum-

otoku,
Tan ashcUcat nckosis ?

Ne uiiclilhiwrisin il wotn-
niattaii naspich a mu$h'
kowUtikicandtf

OwasliiKhiik moslmk kat-
ta kistnlcmapiinuk u-
neho la xcapUtikwand"
liclic; wusa welawow
kacho>Yak niaskoch
ashkwa hitia teapistik'
wanfncuk^

Absalom ke otcbe wnno-
tow o pimatisowin nas-
pich fi kimcalokteatj

Sbawillctakosewiik ka pu-
laketrulclitk.

No ko iiantawapumownk
pelalwuk, ne ke wapu-
mowuk maka, nnma
luaka no otcho paskis-
vrownk iiaspioli ka
gkakotiiUchik^

Tan atoyun, naspiob a
JtssetMsefunf

Have you boon looking
for logs ?

Yes; and I bave found
many large ones bere
and tbero.

Tour trap is very strong
(luotal).

Yos; a fox will not bo
able to break it, pro-
bably.

What is the behaviour of
my son ?

I am sorry to toll you
that ho is very strong-
headed (stubborn).

Chihlien should always
honour the hoary-
beaded, for perhaps they
themselves will yet be-
come white-headed.

Absalom lost his life in
consequence of having
very long hair.

Blessed are they who are
pure hearted.

I went to bunt par-
tridges; I saw them^
but shot none, an they
were very wild.

i.ri
1.(1

t.

I

TUB VERB. 91

AOCIDEXTAL VEKD3.

lliese verbs indicate in general an action aod-^
dental or occafrional, as distingnisbed from what is.
X>ermanent and continuous. A knowledge of a good
number oi them should be obtained at an early stage
in the study of the language. I

Accidental Verbs end in lew in the third peraoa I
singular, indicative mood, present tense, and ha^s
this quality, that in that person the animate and in-
animate terminations arc alike, although thqr vaiy
in the plural and in the 8ubjunctive mood. I

Many of these verbs are impersonal ; as, |

Wastupulew, It lightens.

Tashkipulew, It splits.

Tupipulew, It suffices.

Sekipulew, It spills.

Nunikipulow, ho (it) trembles. f

Indicative Mood. •

Present Tense. 1 tremble. "^
Singular.

1. Ne uunikipul-in.

2. Ke nunikipul-in.

3. An. and Inan. Nunikipul-ew.
Poss. An. Nunikipul-iliwa.

„ Inan. Nunikipul-ilew.

Plural.

and 3) Ne nunikipul-inan.

and 2) Ke nunikipul-inanow.

2. Ke nunikipul-inowow.

3. An. Nunikipul-ewuk.
Jnao. Xunikipul-ewa. \
Fobs. An. KumVi^uVVVvN^ \

Inan. Nnnikix»xjl-V\iva.* \

ft

92

TIIE VERB.

1-

2.

8. An.
loan.
PosB. An.

Subjunctive Mood.
Pr€9ent Tense. (If) I tremble.

Singular.

Xunikipnl-oyan.
Nnnikipnl-eyun .
Xnnikipul-it.
Nnnikipul-ik.
Nunikipul-iliche.

»t

1. (1 and 3)

1. (1 and 2)

2.

3. An.

Inan.

Pofu. An.

Inan. Nunikipiil-ilik.

Plural.
Niinikipul-ejak.

Xnniklpul-cyuk.

Nunikipul-cyuk.

Nunikipul-itcliik.

Nanikipul-ike.

Nunikipul-ilicho.

„ Inan. Nnnikipul-ilike.
These verbs are subject to the iterative x>article; as,

Tatopulew,
Ta-tatopulew,

TashkipnleWy
Tash-tasIikipuleWy
Tetipipulow,
Te-tetipipulew,

It tears.

It tears in different

places; it tears to

pieces.
It splits.

It splits in pieces.
It overturns.
It revolves.

Examples of the Accidental Verb.
Naspichno wesukisin S I» I ttia «c&2bx^Ti% ^g^^A2^cv%

Tl[£

03

Naspich nc ko nunesane-
senan d Ice natwapuJih
mistikokan makwach

_ pumafibejak,

A ke hwatipipttUKk o ohe-
manewow ke niatapo-
wuwuk,

Yakwa, yakwa, net owa-
shimiah ; he ha puhuiiU'
wtipulin^

Mihpuleto na k6ta|)anask ?

Nawuch milopulew^ wusu
kosikwutew maka,

Jesus mena kutta tuko-

shin patema iahhwajml-

iliha uskclcw,
Tan ulekok ka tapiptdik ke

inecliimimowow ?
Kistonach ne ha iapipuUln*

honan nekotwaso kesbi-

kowa ishpiah.

We were in great danger,
as the mast broke while
we were sailing.

Asthoir canoe tnmed over
they were drowned.

Take care, take oare, my
child ; you will ftU into
the water.

Does yonr aledgo more
easily?

It (he) moves along toler-
ably welly but it is too
heavy.

Jesus will come again by-
and-by,when the world
shall end.

How long will your food
last?

Probably it will suffice ua
six days.

TBANSITIVE VERBS.

Transitive Verbs are those in which the action
passes on from the subject to an object; as, Ne
kistulemow Kichemuneto, I honour God ; Ne wapiniln
muchepimaiUemn^ I cast off sin.

In the above examples the verb expresses by its
termination the personal pronouns *' him " and '^it**
jvepeotivefyf so that, literally traxai!b^i^^<^lefi^«GlfiM
would be, I iionour him, Qod ; 1 caa^ ^fL\\^«ak.

94 THE VERB.

Wo liavo now como to tho most difficult part of
our undertaking. The difficulty consists in the ex-
tensive powers which tliis kind of verb possesses ; tho
nominativCf verb, and object, and sometimes a
;:;reat deal more, being ombraccd in a single expres-
tdon, while in the imperative and subjunctive moods
thero is uo due whatever given to the nominative
or accusative case, except the verbal inflection. For
instance, A saJcehuh, that I love him ; hero ** I " and
** him " aro both comprised in tho syllable hnl\ ialx
being tho root of the verb.

This verb has an animate and inanimate form ; as,
Ne icapumowy I neo him ; Ne xcaimiCni^ I see it. It has
likewise a direct and inverse form, arising from the
fact that in the indicative mood the first and second
l>crson8 always stand before tho verb, whether they
be in the nominative or accusative case ; aK, Nc
lUhllemoio, I know him; Ne JciskdlemiJ:, me knows
lie, t.e. he know8 me.

Transitive Verbs are of three Conjugations, agree-
ing in their inanimate direct forms with the tirht,
hecond, and sixth conjugations of the intransitive
verb.

The first conjugntion has but one verb: Mawao^
he eats him ; Mechcw, he eats it.

The second conjugation comprises verbs of a
<;ausative character ; as, Wapew, ne sees ; Wapehao,
lie causes him to see ; Kukatawaletum, lie is wise ;
KuhVawdletumeJido^ he makes him wise. Its termi-
nations are— An. h/id ; Inan. Uno.

Many <>ther verbs are of this conjugation ; as,
Oshehilo, ho makes him; Oshetow, he makes it;
Sakehao, he loves him ; Saketotv, he loves it; P&h&d«
ho waits for him ; Paltow, he ^%\t& Icyc Vu

Mo§t verbs with the aidiMAjevaVko w^\^w»»^

TUE VERB.

95

Poshewao,
Piitow,
Kitumwiiu,
Kitow,

Ukotow, ho hangs it; Kichistapowolao, ho washes
him ; Kichistapowutow, ho washos it.

Ulao, ho placos him, makes Ustow in tho inanimate,
he placos it.

A few verbs with the animate in wid are of this
conJQgation; as,

lie brings him.

Ho brings it.

Ho oonsumos him, cats him up.

Ho oonsumes it, oats it up.

Verbs of the third oonjngHtion have many termi-
nations, that is letters or particles preceding the
final ao, for this ending is constant in all transitiye
verbs of whatever conjugation.

These terminations follow a regular rule, and as
wo saw that nouns and adjective verbs have distinc-
tive terminations, so it is likewise with transitive
verbs. An. mad, Inan. /urn, indicates that the action
is performed by the eyes, nose, or month ; as,

Wapu-muo, lie t^ecs him.

„ turn. Ho sees it.

Mola-mao, He smcllKhim.

„ tum. He smells it.

Mako-mao, He bites him.

„ tum. Ho bites it.

When tndo is preceded by «/<*, the action of the
mind is indicated ; as,

Miton-ale-mao, He thinks of him.

„ tum. He thinks of it»

An. pwao^ Inan« ttum, implies the action of the
palate; as,

i-pwAo, 'E^ \as\«a V\m«

stum. Hb \a»\^ V^

ff

or»

THE VERD.

Woki-pwuii,
„ stum.

Ho likes the taste of him.
He likes the taste of it.

An. nao^ Inan. num^ indicates the hand ; aa«

Oti-nai), Ho takes hiin.

., nuni, He takes it.

Machiko-niliif He lays hold on him.

y, niim. He lays hold on it.

An. Uhkatau, Inan. Uhkatum^ or An. UhJkutc&Ot Inan.
ttUum, indicates the action of the foot, or an adverse
action; as.

Ho kicks him.

Ho kicks it.

He meets him (walking).

He mocts it.

He passes before him.

He passes before it.

An. pUiiu^ Inan. piicm^ indicates the action ol the
arm in pulling or tying ; as,

Wuhiwo-pitilu, He pulls him out.

„ pitum^ He pulls it out.

Mako-pitmi, He ties him.

„ pitum. Ho ties it.

An. iutcao^ Inan. ium^ indicates verbs of hearing ;

Tuk-ishkatuu,
,. ishkatum,

Nuk-ishkuwuii,
„ ishkum,

Ukw-ashkuwao,
„ ashkum.

fa-tuwuo,
„ tum,
Kuto-tuwOo,

Niseto-tawad,
»f tum,

ft turn,

He hears him.
He hears it.
He listens to him.
He listens to it.
He understands him.
He UTidsi%\»3i<i^^

He \ieaxa\i^ 'mS5a.^'^^^S
a^ \i«Ma \V ^«fi^^v\q •

TUK VERB. 97

An. nomw^ Inan. iiKfliy indicates a manner of
seeing; as,

Isho-now&Oy He so sees him.

„ nnm, He so sees it.

Eitemake-nowiluy Ho looks on him with pity.

„ num. He looks on it with pity.

An. tr/icf, Inan. hum^ indicates an action done with
force; as,

Peko-waO, He breaks him with foroe.

,. hum. He breaks it with force.

Pukumu-wuo, Ho beats him, as with a

cudgel.
„ hum, Ho beats it, do.

This joined to certain roots indicates likewise by
water; as,

Nuku-wrio, Ho meets him, by water.

„ hum. He meets it, do.

Natu-wud, Ho fetches him, by water.

„ hum, He fetches it, do.

An. iimd, Inan. turn, indicates the action of heat
or fire ; as,

Iskwa-swuu, He bums him.

„ sum. He bums it.

Pa-swau, He dries him.

„ sum. He dries it.

An. ihwadj Inan. #Atim, indicates cutting, as with a
knife; as,

Mati-shwao, He cuts him.

„ shun. He cuts it.

Ifnni-flhwio, T3a Quti^ «i ^^Iqoq from him.

flham, He csa\» % ^\»^ Insa^Sx^

ff

I

\

V

98

TBE VERD.

An. Jcuictid, Inan. iihum^ indicates cutting witli
force, chopping; as.

Clii-kAwa<»,
„ kAhum,
Eoshke-kiiwfio,
„ k&hnm.

lie chops him.
He chops it.
Ho chops him ofil
He chops it off.

In some cases a particle is inserted between ku
andtcfld; as,

Kesh-ku-Ztt-wuG, Ho cuts him off.

„ ku-/N-hum, Ho cuts it off.

En-fCM-'wais Ho cuts him down.

„ Inim, He cuts it doTi-n.

Illustrative Vkrbs.

He breaks him, with the

mouth.
Ho breaks it, do.

He breaks him, with tbo

hand.
Ho breaks it, do.

He breaks him, with the
foot, or accidentally.
He breaks it, do.

Ho breaks him, by pulling.
He breaks it, do.

Ho breaks him, by burning.
He breaks it, do.

He breaks him, by cutting.
He breaks it, do.

He breaks him, by chop*

ping.
He breaks it^ ds^«

Peko-niui* (An.),

ft

tum (Inan.),

f»

nuu (An.),

99

num (Inan.),

99

shkuwilii (An.),

99

shkum (Inan.),

99

pitaii (An.),

99

pi tum (Inan.),

99

swau (An.),

99

sum (Inan.),
shwaii (An.), •
shum (Inan.),

99

•
9»

99

kfiwmi (An.),

99

Idiihum (Inan.)»

99

wilo (An.),

ff

Jboin (liian.).

THE VERD. 00

Some verbs end in An. tdo and tcao^ Inan. turn ;
as,

Pukwa-t&o, He hates him.

„ turn. He hates it.

Wapu-tAii, Ho sees his track.

Itt&o, He says to him.

An. itowiiOf Inan. stum^ indicates to, in front of.

Ayumoh&-stowau, Ho prays to him.

„ stum. He prays to it.

Otishkowokapowe-stowao, He stands before, facing

him.
„ stum. Ho stands before, facing it.

Nowuke-stowao, Ho bows down to him.

„ stum. He bows down to it.

The dative particles aro ium, or tcm, and io^ the
terminations being tumowiw and (ottao; the latter
when the object is animate, and the former when
inanimate; although this distinction is but little
attended to in practice.

To-tum, He does it

To-tumowao, lie does it for him.

To-towuu, He does it to him.

We-tum, He tells it.

Wc-tumowuo, Ho tells it to him.

Pa-tow, He brings it.

Pa-towuu, He brings him or it to

him.

Xipa-huo, He kills him.
Kipa-towuo, „ „ for him.

Nipi-tumowuo, He kills it for him.

Wupinum, He casts it away.
Wapin-umowuo, „ „ for him.

The vicariona particle it ilum^ ^<^ 'UxxsiaoA.tianL i
sOfMotffdd: as.

1

f

\

100

TIIE VERD.

Nijicw, He dies.

Ni]K>-8tu»iowao, Ho (lies for him.

Aymnew, Ho 8i)cak8.

Ayiiinc-stumowuOy Ho speaks for him.
Ayiiiiichow, He prays.

Ayumohu-stamowilo, Ho prays for him.

An. Icatfiii, Iiinn. iatum^ added to a noun indicates
the mukin;^ or changing into the noun ; as.

Okimow,

Oki inowe-kaf ai's

Ow{ikan,

Out Akauo-katnuy

XT'

>11)C,

Ni|>c-katuni,

A chief.

He makes him a chief.
A slave.

Ho makes him a shtve.
Water.

He makes it water, waters
it, dilutes it.

To exi)rc8S com]xinionship, the prefix tcecJie^ some*
times contracted into teei or tee, with the affix mrlo,
is used ; as,

Tushekari, He stays.

'Wechc-tusheku-m.io, He stays with him.
T'i)cw, He sits.

Wct-upe-mao He sits with him.

Nipow, Ho sleeps.

We-ni2)a-mriu, He sleeps with him.

The student must not be alarmed by these various
forms, for they influence but little the inflections of
the verbs they modify; and those inflections are
marked by so beautiful a regularity, that when a
verb of either conjugation is mastered, very little
difficulty will be experienced in acquiring ^\L^^}QL^
verbs in the language* for «caxci^^ vk;i ^»sdl\^ ~~
to be imgtilarly dedined*

THE VERB.

101

Constant Tjerminations of the Transitive Animate
ysiid, direct, for all conjuoations.

Indicative Mood.
Present Tcumc.

Singular. (Nom.)

1. ow. 2. ow. 3. Ao.

riural. (Nom.)

1. (1 and 3) anan. 1. (1 and 2) ananow. 2. owow.

3. 1'iwiik.

Singular. (Xom.) PL Ace.
1. owuk. 2. o\vuk. 3. au.

Plural. (Nom.) PL Ace.

1. (1 and 3) ananuk. I. (1 and 2) ananowuk.

2. owowuk. 3. Tiwuk.

THE FIRST CONJUGATION. Andiatb.
Mowao/ ho cats him.

Indicative Mood.
Pre$eni Tense, DirecL

S. 1. No mow-ow,
Ko mow-ow,
Mow-uu,

1\ Ne mow-anan,
Ke mow-aiianow,
Ke mow-owow,
Mow-Hwuk,

Singular.

I cat him.
Thou eatest him.
Ho oats him.
Wo cat him.
Wo eat him.
You cat him.
They eat him.

* This IB comet imc8 prononDced Moowuu^and it is from this-
that tho flat towcI ^^mwawat" it obtained. If the rerb wei«
simp]y **inowkdf*' it would follow the (seneral rule, and in its
Xb/ rowel /ann would be ** umowvX^ Vw Wia ^^a^s^ \|ibm(i^
tiogahur, uiimate form.

\

102

THE YECD.

Hural.

s.

r.

b.

p.

s.

p.

S.

No mow-owuk,

Ko mow-owuk,

3Iow-ao,

No mow-ananuk,

Ko mow-anauowuk,

Ko luow-owownk,

Mow-uwuk,

luvene.

No niow-ik,
Ko mow-ik,
Mow-iko^

No mow-ik-onan,
Ko mow-ik-onanow,
Ko mow-ik-owow,
Mow-iko-wuky

I oat thorn.

Thou eatest thorn.

He eats them.

We oat thorn.

Wo eat them.

You oat them.

They eat him or them.

Singular.

Ho cats mo.

Ho oats thee.

Ho is eatoii by him or

them.
Ho cats us.
Ho cats us.
He eats you.
They are eaten by him

or them.

PluraL

No mow-ik-muk,

Ko inow-ik-wuk,

Mow-iko,

No mow-ik-onan-uk,

Ko mow-ik-ODow-uk,

They eat me.

They eat thee.

He is oaten by them.

They oat us.

They eat us.
Ko mow-ik-oivow-uk, They cat you.
Mow-iko-wuk, They are oaten by him

or them.

Pa$i Ten$e. I ate, was eating, or did eat him.

Direct.

No mow-atr,
Ee mow-ati,
O moir-atl, or

Singular.
I ate him.

THE VEBB.

103

P.

S.

P.

S.

P.

&

Ne mow-ata-nan,
Ke mow-ata-nanoWy
Ko mow-ata-wow,
O mow-ata-wow, or
Mow-tLpon-iik,

We ate bim.
We ate him.
You ate him*
They ate him*

PluraL

Ne mow-atl-Tiky
Ke mow-atl-uk,
O mow-ati, or
Mow-ilpun,
Ne inow-ata-nan-tik»
Ee mow-ata-now-uk,
Ee mow-ata-wow-uk,
mow-ata-wow, or
Mow-Apun-uk,

Inver9e.

Ne mow-ik-oti,
Ee mow-ik-otr,
O xnow-ik-otly

Ne mow-ik-ota-nan,
Ee mow-ik-ota-nowy
Ee mow-ik-ota-woWy
mow-ik-ota-wow.

I ate them.

Thoa didst eat them*

He eat them.

We ate them.
Wo ate them.
You ate them.
They ato them.

Singuhir.

Ho ato me.

Ho ate thee.

Ho was eaten by him

or them.
Ho ate us.
He ate us.
Ho ate you.
They are eaten by him

or them.

PluraL

No mow-ik-otl-uk,
Ee mow-ik-otr-uk,
O mow-ik-otr, or
Mow-ik-opun,

-*-..tian-uk»

They ate me.
They ate thee.
He was oaten by him
or them.

104

THE VERlt.

Kc mow-ik-ota-wow-Tik, Tlioy ato you.

O mow-ik-ota-wow, or Thoy aro eaten by him

Mowrik-^puu-uk, or thorn.

As all the otlicr tonscs of tlio indicativo niooil, aa
well as those of the optative and potential moods, aro
exactly like those here given, except that indeclin-
able particles aro jtrcfixed to the verbal root, I shall
only fjcive the lirst person, direct and inverse, of
each tense, remarking only that in all future tenses,
where tlie verb in the thinl iKSiiJon governs a noun
or pronoun in tlic third person, the particle JcnUa is
the prefix ; as, Kutta mowuu, he will eat him ; Kutta
mowiko>viik. They will bo eaten by him or them.

Direct.

Ne ke mowow,
\e ko luowatf,
Xe ka mowow,
Ko ka ke mowatr,
Xe w© mowow,
Xe go mowow,
Xo ko we mowow,
Xe ka we mowow,
X'e ka go mowow,
Xo we mowatT,
Xe ka mowatr,
Xe ka go mowatT,
Xo ka ko mowati,

I have eaten him.

I had eaten him.

I will eat him.

I shall have eaten him.

I wish to cat him.

I can eat him.

I liave wished to eat him.

I shall wish to eat him.

I shall bo ablo to eat him.

I wished to eat him.

I should eat him.

I could have eaten him.

I should have eaten him.

Inverse.

Xe ko mowik.

No ke mowikoti,

Ne ka mowik,

Xe Ira ke mowikoti,
Ao vre mowik,
Ne ge mowik,

IIo has eaten me.
lie had eaten me.

IIo will «AX\Si<^«

11^ CKa «^^ ^Bi^*

THB VERB.

105

Xo ko
No ka
Ne ka
No wo
No ka
Ne ka
Noka

wo mowik,
we xnowiky
go mowiky
mowikotTy
mowikotr, '
go mowikotr,
ke mowikoti,

IIo has wished to cat me.
Ho will witih to cat mo.
IIo will bo able to cat me.
Ho >\'iBlicd to oat ma
He should cat me.
IIo could Imve eaton me.
He should have oaten me.

First and Second Pcr$on$»

Whore the first and second personal pronouns aro
connocted, ono as the subject, tho other as the object
of tho Yorb, tho contracted form of tho second pereon
idways precedes tho verb, never the first.

Present Tense. Direct.

Ko mow-in, Thou eatest me.

Ke mow-in-owow, You eat mo.
Ke mow-in-an, Thou eatest us, or you

cat us.

Inverse.

Ko mow-ittin, I cat thee.

Ke mow-ittin-owow, I cat you.

Ke mow-ittin-an, Wo eat thee or you.

Past Tense. Direct.

Ko mow-ittr, Thou didst eat mo.

Ko mow-it-owow, You did eat mo.
Ke mow-it-tan, Thou didst eat ub» or you

did cat us.

Inverse.

Ko mow-ittiti, I did eat thee.

Ke mdr-ittit-owow, 1 diJi caX ^om»
£e inoir-itti-tan, \f o Oiai o^\. ^^ w ^^xk.

106

THE VERB.

InpERjLTiyE Mood.

Pre$eiU Ten$e.

Siogular.

Mow-o, Eat thou him.

Akosho kntta mowAoy Let him cat him.

Mow-atoWy Lot us eat him.

Mow-ik« Eat ye him.

AkoBhe kntta mow&wuk. Lot them oat him.

Flural.

Mow-ik,

Akoeho kntta mowAo,

^low-at-anuky

Mow-ik-ok,

Akosho kntta mow&wnk,

Eat thou thorn.
Lot him cat them.
Let us cat them.
Eat yo them.
Let them eat them*

Mow-akun,
Mow-akakf
Mow-akuky

Future Tense.

Singular.

Eat thou him.
Lot us cat him.
Eat ye him.

Plural.

Mow-aknnik, l*Iat thou them.

Mow-akwawinik, Lot us eat them.

Mow-akakok, Eat ye them.

This fntnxo tcnso is but seldom used.

Mow-in,

3fow-ina&,

Uov-ik,

IVnl and Second PctBone.
IVcsont Tonso.

TUE VERB.

107

Mow-ekun,
Mow-ekilk,

Future Tense.

Eat thou me.
Eat ye mo.

SaDJUNcnvE Mood.
Present Tense. Direct,

Singular.

Lot me again romind tlio student that in this
mood both pronouns, nominative and acousativo, are
expressed by the inflootion.

Mow-\ik,

Mow-iit,

Mow-at,

]Mow-uk-it,

Mow-uk,

Mow-uk,

Mow-at-chik, or

Mow-at-wow,

(That) I eat him.

Thou eatcst him.

lie eats him.

Wo (1 and 3) eat him.

Wo (1 and 2) eat him.

You eat him.

They eat him.

Plural.

I eat them.

Thou eatest them.

He eats them.

We ^1 and 3) eat them.

Wo (1 and 2) eat them*

You eat them.

They eat them.

On the East Main Coast the plural runs thus —

I^Iow-uk-ik,

Mow-ut-chik,

Mow-at,

Mow-uk-it-chik,

Mow-uk-ik,

Mow-uk-wuk,

Mow-at-chik,

Mow-uk-wow,
Mow-ut-wow,
Mow-at,

JUow-uk-it-woWf
MoW'Uk'VroWt

I eat them.
Thou eatest them.
He oats them*

'ir

Vfo V> WlftL'i^^ftX^^SWKBSu

\

108

THE VERD.

Mow-ak-WOW,

Mow-at-wow,

Mow-it,

lilow-ihk,

Mow-ik-ot,

3Iow-cyumft,

Mow-itti'ik,

Mow-itt«k,

Mow-iko<>chik, or

Mow-ikot-wow,

You cat thciiv.

Thoy cat him cr them.

Inv€T9e. Singular.

lie cats mc.
llo cats thee.
ITo is eaten hy him.
IIo cats us (1 anil *}).
lie eats us (1 and 2).
JIo eats you.

They are eaten by him
cr them.

riural.

Mow-it-chik,

Mow-ink-ik,

Mow-ikut,

Mow- cyumit-chik,

Mow-itti'ik-wuk,

Mow-i ttak->vuk,

Mow-ikot-chik,

They cat mc.

Thoy eat thee.

He is eaten by them.

They cat us (l and 3).

Thoy eat us \\ and 2).

1'hoy cat you.

They are eaten by them.

3Iow-it-wow,

jVIow-isk-wow,

Mow-ikot,

Mow-oyuniit-wow,

Mow-i tti'ik-wow,

!Mow-i t tak- wo w,

Mow-ikot-wow,

East Main Plural.

Tliey eat mo.

Thoy cat thee.

Ho is eaten by them.

7
They cat us (1 and 3).

They cat us (1 and 2).

They cat you.

They are eaten by them.

Mow-uk-epuui
JUbir-ut-epun,

Patt TcMe. Direct.
Singular.

TIIE VKRll.

100

Mow-uk-it^opun,
MoAv-uk-opun,
Mow-ak-epun,
Mow-a>^ra8-puiiy

( jMow-uk-ik-epun,
\ Mow-uk-wa-pun,

Mow-ut-wa-pun,

Mow-as-pim,

Mow-uk-it-wa-pun,

lilow-uk- wa-piin ,

Mok-nk-wa-pim,

Mo w-awa«-piiii ,

Inveric.

]^Iow-is-pun,

Mow-isk-opun,

Mow-ikos-pun,

Mow-ey u mit-epim,

Mow-ittiMc-cpnn,

Mow-ittak-epun,

Mow-ikos-pim,

We (1 and 3) ate him.
We (1 and 2) ate him.
Yon ate him.
They ate him.

Flnral.

I ate thorn.

Then didst eat them.
He ate them.
We (1 and 3) ate them.
Wo (1 and 2) ate them.
You ate them.
TJioy ato them.

Singular.

Mow-it-wa-pun,

Mow-isk-wa-pun,

Mow-ikos-pun,

Mow-oynmit-wa-pnn ,

^low-ittiSik-wa-pun,

Mow-itt^k-wa-pun,

Mow-iko-was-pun,

He ate mo.

Ho ate thee.

He was eaten by him.

Ho ate us (1 and 3\

Ho ate us (1 and 2).

Ho ate you.

Ho was eaten by him.

riural.

They ato mo.

Tho^ ate thee.

Ho IS oaten by them.

They ate us (l and S\

They ate us (1 and 2).

They ate you.

Thoy were eaten by them.

JfoW'Uk-u,

Future Tent. Dtreei.

Singular.

1{ or ^\i»iL\ ^^\as&u
1{ iboa eAXi\axQu

\

110

THE VERB.

Mow-at-u,

Mow-iik-it-a,

Mow-iik-a,

Mow-ak-wfi,

Mow-at-wawa,

Mow-uk-wawa,

]Mow-ut-wawa,

Mow-ut-a,

]iIow-iik-it-wawfi,

Mow-iik-wawa,

Mow-a"ik-\vawa,

Mow-at-wawa,

Invene,

Mow-it-a,

Mow-ihk-a,

Mow-ikot-a,

3Iow-cyiunit-a,

Mow-itti\k-a,

3Iow-ittak->va,

Mow-ikot-wawa,

If lio eat Lira.

If wo (1 and «i) cat him.

If wo (1 and 2) eat him.

If yon cat him.

If they cat liim.

Plural.

If I eat them.
If then cat thorn.
If ho cat tlicin.

If wo (I and :i) eat them.
If wo (1 and 2) cat them.

If yon cat tlieni.
If they eat them.

Singular.

If ho cat mo.

If ho cat thee.

If ho is eaten hy him.

If ho eat ns (1 and 3).

If ho cat ns (1 and 2).

If ho cat yon.

If thoy arc eaten by him.

riural.

5Iow-it-wa^\.1:

Mow-isk-wawii,

j\Iow-ikot-a,

Mow-eynmi t-wawa,

Mo w-i tt&k-wa wa,

Mow-ittak-wawa,

mow-ikot-wawa,

If they cat mo.

If they eat thee.

If ho is eaten by them.

If they eat ns CI and 3\

If they cat ns (l and 2),

If they cat you.

If thoy are eaten by them.

Fir$i and Second Persons.
Present Tense. Direct*

Jfoir-ejUD,

THE VERII. Ill

How-eyak, Thou eatest xm^ or joa

eat UB.

Isvorse.

Mow-ittan, I eat thee.

Mow-f ttak-wuk, I eat you.

Mow-ittak, We eat thee or yoo.

Fast Tense. Direct.

Mow-eyn-pun, Thou didst eat me.

Mow-eyak-epun, Thou didst eat us.

Mow-eyuk-epun, You did eat me.

Inverse.

Mow-itta-pun, I ate thee.

Mow-fttak-wuk-epun, I ate you.
Mow-ittak-cpun, Wo ate thee or you.

Future Tense. Direct.

Mow-eyun-u, If thou cat mo.

]^Iow-eyak-u, If thou eat us.

Mow-eyak-wtt, If you cat me.

Inverse.

Mow-ittan-il, If I eat thee.

Mow-fttak-wuk-u, If I cat you.
Mow-ittak-wu, If wc eat thee or you.

Tho perfect, pluperfect, and second future tenses
are fonned from those now given by adding the
prefix Jce ; thus,

Ke mowuk, Tlf) I have eaten him.

Eo mowukepun, (If) I had eaten him.

Ee mowtiko. When I shall have oaten

him.

Lei me remind the student of \\i.o ^f5bnBCA.tr<f%
cisnufter of the sobjunctivid mooOi*

112

TIIE VERB.

Ka mowiik,
Ka ge mownk«
Kil wo mowukf
Ka mowuk,
Ka ko mowuk,
Ka mowukepiin,
Ka f^ moTimkepun,

Kil ko mownkopun.

I shall oat him.

I shall bo ablo to eat him.

I shall wish to cat him.

I ato him.

I have oaten him.

I would eat him.

I should be ablo to eat

him.
I had eaten or would

have oaten him.

Eefi^ective FoRir.

This is declined as an intransitive verb of the
fourth conjugation.

IxDicATivE Mood.

PrcBcni TcMC,

Singular.

No mow-ittison, I cat myself.
Ko mow-ittison. Thou eatest thy-
self.
Mow-ittiso, ITu eats himself.

Mow-ittiso-makun, It eats itself.
Mow-ittisoliwa, His him eats him-
self.
Inan. Mow-ittisomakun- His it, etc.
ilcw,

riural.

No mow-ittisonan,
Ke mow-ittison-

anow,
Ee mow-ittison-

awow,

Maw*itiiaoTni\c,

1.
2.

3. An.
Inan.
Poss. An.

1. (1 and .1)
1. (1 and 2)

2.

We eat ourselves.
Wo eat ourselvos.

You eat yourselves.

THE VERB.

113

3. Inan«

Mow-itti8omaktin-
wa,
Po68. An. Mow-ittisolewa,

y, Inan. Mow-ittisomakan-
iliwa.

They cat tbein-

selves.
His tbemeat them-

selves.
Do.

SuDJUNCTiTB Mood.
Present Ten$e.

1.
2.

:;. An.
Inan.

Singular.

Mow-ittisoyan,
Mow-it:i8oyun,
Mow-ittisot,
Mow-it tisoniakuk,
Poss. An. Muw-ittisoliche,

„ Inan. Mow-ittisomakun-
ilik.

Plural.
1. (1 and 3) Mow-ittisoyak,

(If) I cat myself.
Thou cat thvself.
Ilo eat himMcIf.
It eat itself.
His him eat him-
self.
His it, etc

(If) we eat our-
selves.

1 . (1 and 2) iilow-ittisoyuk, We eat ourselves.

Mow-itti soy ilk. You cat yourselves.
Mow-ittisochik, They eat them-
selves.
Mow-ittisomakuke, They eat them-
selves. '
Poss. An. Mow-ittisoliche, His them cat them-
selves.
Inan. Mow-itiisomakuiir Do*
ilike.

:j. An.
Inan.

n

\

114 THE VERB.

Indeterminale Per$an$.

Indicative Mood.

Present Tewte.

Mow-ittitionanowan, Peo]ile are eating

theuiselveB.
l»ol. Mow-ittitfonanewunilew, Do. in relation to

others.

Past Tense.

Mowittisonanowiin-opiin, People were, eta
Kol. Mow-ittisouanewunil-opun,

Subjunctive Mood.

Present Tense.

Mow-itt^sonanewuk, People are eating

themselves.
Kel. Mow-itti8onane^vunilik, Do. in relation to

others.
Past Tense.

Mow-ittisonancwnk-epun. People were, etc.
Bel. Mow-ittisonauowunolik-epun.

Reciprocal Form.
This too is of the fourth conjugation.

Indicative Mood.

Present Tense.

Plural.

1 . n and 3^ Ne mow*ittonan. We eat each other.

1. (1 and 2) Ke mow-ittonanow, We^aX«i«:^^>^<^«

2. £e Qiow-ittowoif , XoM^ftX^AjSck^'OBk^T.

3. Ad. How-ittowuk, TVk«i ^"^ ^**^

THE VERB. 115

3. Inan. Mow-ittoiuakunwa,They cat each

other.
Posh. Ad. Mow-ittoliwa, Hin them eat each

other.
„ Inan. Mow-itiomakon- Do.

iliwa,

SuaiuNCTivE Mood.
Present Tense,

Plural.

1.(1 and 3) Mow-ittoyak, We eat each other.

1. (1 and 2) Mow-ittoyuk, We eat each other.

2. Mow-ittoyuk, You eateach other.

3. An. Mow-ittochik, They eat each

oUier.
Inan. Mow-ittomaknke, Do.

Po88. An. Mow-ittoliche, His them eat each

other.
„ Inan. Mow-ittomakun- Do.
ilike.

Indeterminate Persons,
Indicative Mood.

Present Tense.

Mow-ittonanewun, or People are eating

Mow.anewun, each other.

Rel. Mow-ittonanewunilew, or
Mow-anewunilow.

Past Tense,

Mow-ittonanewun-opun, or
Jibir-ADewun-opun.
SeL i/bir-ittonanewunil-«puu, or
Ifoir-aneivunil-epuxi

IKi THE VERIU

SuBJUscTivE Moon.

Prcmnit Tenf.

lilow-ittonanowuk, or People are eating

^Fow^nowiik, each other.

Kcl. ^low-it'onanewnnilik, or
Mow-anowunilik.

Past Ten$n,

]^row-ittoTinnewiik-opun, or
Mow-aijcwiik-opim.
licl. Mow-ittonnncwunilik-epun, or
Mow-ancwunilik-epuD.

Tl.'O diiLitative, 8ii]>po8itivo, ami popaessive fonriR
of the traoKifive animate ivill bo given after the
Third Conjugation.

THE FIRST CONJUGATION. Inanimate.

Mechew, he eats it.

Tills is the only verb in the lang»»ge in which
the root of the animate differs from that of the in-
animate form.

Mow ... Root of the animate form.
Mvcli ... „ inanimate „

As before stated, this verb in its direct form
coriesponds with the first conjugation of the in-
transitive vorlMt ; the inverKC fonn of all transitive
iniininiate verbis corresponds with the fourth intransi-
tive conjugation.

THE VERB.

117

Indicative Mood.
PreMfii Ten»e. DireeL

Ne mech-in,
Re TDOch-in,
Mocli-ew,

Xe moch-inan,
Ke mech-inanow,
Ko mcch-iiiowow,
Mcch-ewuk,

Inv€r$€,

Ne mow-ik-on,
Ke mow-ik-on,
Mow-iko,

Singular.

I eat it.
Thou eatest it.
lie eats it.

Plural.

We (1 and 3) eat it.
Wo (land 2) eat it.
You eat it.
They eat it.

Singular.

It eats me.
It eats thee.
It eats him.

Plural.

Xe mow-ik-onan,
Kc mow-ik-onanow,
Ke mow-ik-onowow,
Mow-iko- wuk,

It eats U8 (l and 3).
It cats UH (1 and 2).
It cats you.
It eats them.

SuBJUNcnvE Mood.
Present Tenee, Direct.

Mech-eyan,
Meeh-eyun,
Mech-it,

Mech-eyak,

Mecb-eyukf

Mfch-eyak^

Singular.

(If) I eat it.
Thou eat it.
He eat it.

Plural.

(If) we (1 and 3) eat it
We (I and 2) eat it.
'You eaX \X..

l\i^ THE VERB.

Invene, Singular.

Mow-ik-oyan, (If) it eat me.

I^Iowik-oyun, It eat thee.

Mow-ik-otf It eat hiiu.

riural.

Mow-ik-oyak, (If) it eat us (1 and 3).

Mow-ik-oynk; it eat us (1 and 2).

Mow-ik-oyuk, It eat you.

Mow-ik-otchik, It out them.

Imperative Mood.

Present Tense,

Moch-o, Kat thou it.

Akoslio kutta mechew, l^et him cat it.

i^Ii*oh-etow, lift U8 eat it.

Mfch-t'k, hlat ye it.

.Vk(i«he kutta mechewuk. Let them eat it.

Future,

^Ifcli-e-kun, Eat thou it.

M(.*oh-c-kak, Let us eat it.

^kltM^h-e-kak, Eat ye it.

Tlie altHtract verb, lie eats, Mecheso, is an in-
transitive one of the fourth conjugation.

Xe nieches-on, I eat.

A mcches-oyau. That I eat, etc.

THE PASSIVE VERB.

Ilicre are two fonns of the Passive Verb : IK^ ^nv^.
accidental, as IskMraso, wl\\c\\ v\Ta\iV^ ^<^«c^:% ^>>^
fact that he ib burnt, and th© •©wm^.l^'^^'^^'^*^^^^'
^ew, be h burnt by tomcbod^, \iid!^&sa\A«

THE VERB.

119

The accidental is applied to a few verbs only, and
those mostly in connection with fire ; as.

Wak-iso,

Wak-itfio,

Muskow-iso,

Muskow-it&o,

We have likewise —

Makop-iso,
Makop-ituo,
Uk-o»o,
Uk-otai),

He is bent by fire.

It do.

He is strenci^hened {or

hardened) by fire.
It is do.

Ho is tied.

Ir do.

He id hun^ up.

It do. ; and a few others.

The general passive is formed from the inverse
fonu of the transitive animate, by adding the particle
o/rin to the first and second pei*sons singular and
plural ; ow or akuneitew to the root of the verb f<»r
the third i>en$on singular ; owuk or akuneweieuk for
the third person pluial.

Passive Voice.

Indicative Mood.

Present Ten$e.

Singular.

Ne mow-ik-owin, I am eaten.
Ke mow-ik-owin, Thou art eaten.
Mow-ow, or He is eaten.

Mow-akunewew,
Mech-enanewun, It is eaten.
Mow-aliwa, or His him is eaten.
Mow-akunewil\w«b,
Inan. JUeoh-enanewun- Him \t \% «tos^.

1.

2.

a. An.

Inan.
Puss. An.

f9

120 THE VERB.

riural.

1. (1 and 3) Xeniow-ik-owin- Wo are oaten.

an,

1. (1 and 2) Koniow-ik-owin- Wo are oaten.

anow,

2. £emowik-owin- You are eaten.

QWOW,

3. An. Mow-ow-nk, or They are eaton.

Mow-ow-akiincwownk,
Inan. Moch-euauowun- Do.

wa,
I'o68. An. ^[ow-aliwa, or Ilis them are oaten.
Mow-akunowiliwa,
luan. Mt'ch-ouaiicwun- Do.
iliwa.

v«

fcLst Ten$e.
Siii^lar.

1 . No mow-ik-ow-iti, I was eaton.

2. Ko mow-ik ow-iti, Thou wast eaten.

3. An. O uiow-uti, or Ho was oaten.

Mow-»i|mn, or
M ow-akuuc wopun,
Inan. Mich-enanowun- It was eaten.

Opllll,

Poss. An. ]^Iow-u1epnn, or His him was oaten*
Mow-akiinowilopun,
„ Inan. Mech-cnnnewun- His it was eaten,
ilopiiu,

Plural.

1. (1 and 3) Xe mow-ik-ow- We were eaten.

itanan,
1. (1 and 2) Ka mow-ik*o^- I>^

itaiiauo^^

THE VERB. 121

2. Ee inow-ik-ow-ito- Ton were eaten.

wow,

3. An. ino\v-ik-ow-ito- They were eaten*

wow, or
Mo w-apun-uk, or
Mow-akuiiewepunuk,
Inan. Mc*ch-enanowun-

opuu-wa. Do.

Poss. An. Mow-alcpun, or Hia them were
Mow-akuuowilo- eaten,
pun.
„ luan. Mcch-enanowun- Do.

ilepuuwa,

Subjunctive Mood.

Present Tense,

Singular.

1. Mow-ik-ow-ej'an, (If) I am eaten.

2. Mow-ik-ow-eyuu, Thou art 6»iten.

3. An. ^low-it, or IIo U oaten.

jVIow-akunewit,
luan. Mech-eiiaiiowuk, It is eaton.

ro88. An. 3Iow-alicho, or His him is eaten,
^low-aknuowiliche,
„ Inan. Moch-enanowun- His it is eaton, or
ilik, it is eaten in ie>

lation to him.

Plural.

1. (1 and 3) Mow-ik-ow-eyak, (If) we are eaten.

1. (I and 2) ^low-ik-ow-eyuk, Wo are eaton.

2. Mow-ik-ow-cyak, You am eaten.

3. An. Mow-it-chik, or They are eaten.

3Iow-akunow\\oYok^
lium. Heoh-enanewukA^ \

122 TOE VERB.

Vo99, An. Mow-aliche, or His them are eaten,
M(»\v-akunewi- or they are eaten

liche, in relation tu him.

„ Inan. IVI^'ch-enanewun- Do.
ilike.

Past Tenae.

Singular.

1 . Mow-ik-ow-eya- (If) I were eaten.

pan,

2. Mow-ik-ow-eyu- Thon wert eaten.

pun,
.*{. An. Mow-ig-pnn, or Tie were eaten.

Mow-aknnewis-pun,
Inan. Mcch-cnanowuk- It were eaten.

ejmn,
Mcch-onanowunoko-pnnil,
I'oRS. An. Mow-al-is-pun, or His him were eaten.
Mow-akunewil-iH-pun,
„ Inan. Mech-cnancwun- His it were eaten,
elik-epnn,

rinral.

1. (1 and 3) >Iow-ik-ow-eyak- (If) we were eaten.

epun,
1.(1 and 2) ^^low-ik-ow-eyuk- We were eaten.

e]>im,

2. Mow-ik-ow-eyiik- You were eaten.

epun,

3. An. ^low-iwaa-pun, or They were eaten.

Mow-Hkimowewas-pun,
Inan. ]ilech-enanewuk-wa*pun, or

Mech-enanewunowako-punu,
PitHB. An. Mow-aliwaa-pun, His them weroeati'U.
or liIow-akun«w\\\^i^\raccL^
M Inan. Meoli'^niaie^vruiiVi^-^wv^'^^

THE VERB. 128

Future Ten§e.
Singular.

1. Mow-ik-ow- If or when I am

03*an-il, eaten.

2. lilow-ik-ow-oyun-a.

3. An. Mow-it-H, or

Mow^kuncwit-ii.
Jnan. Mcch-onunowuk-a.

VoHH, An. I^Iow-ilit il, /»r

Mow-akuncwilit-H.
„ Inan. Me3h-6nane%vunilik-&.

Plural.

1.(1 nnd 3) Mow-ik-owoyak-a.

1. (1 and 2) Mow-ik-owoyuk-a.

2. ]^low-ik-oweyak-wa.

3. An, How-it-wawa, or

iMow-akuncwit-wawa.
Inan. ]Mech-enanewuk-wawri.

Puhtt. An. Mow-ilit-wawa, or

aMow-akunewilit-wawa.
„ Inan. Moch-enanewuuilik-wawa.

THE SKCOXD CONJUGATION.

The termination of verbs of this conjugation aro.
An. hdu and Ido, with a few in tcdo ; Inau. tow.

Animate Form. Sakehao, he loves him.

Indicative Mood.
Present Tense, Direct.
Singular.
No Kakeh-ow, I love him.

N.

124 TUE VERB.

Xo sakoli-anan. We love hiiru

Ko Siikoh-anunow, You love him.

Ko SJikeh-owow, You love him.

iSukeh-uwuk, 'i'hey love him.

Plural

Xo Rakeh-ow-nk, I love them.

Ke sakoh-ow-uk, 'J'lion loveKt them.

Sakch-aii, IL* li»vc8 thorn.

Xc 8iikeh-anan-uk, "NVo love them.

Ke Kakoh-auauow-uk, "NVe love them.

Ke 8ak«*h-owow-uk, You love them.

JSakch-uwuk, They luve them.

Jnrerte. Singular.

Xo «akch-ik, lie loves me.

Ke 8jikoli-ik, He loves thee.

Sakeli-iko, lie is loved by him *»»'

them.
Xo sakch-ik-onan, lie hives us.
K» Nikch-ik-onow, He loves lis.
Ke KJikoh-ik-owow, He loves you.
2Sukeli-iko-wuk, Tiiey are loved by him

or them.

Plural.

Ne sakeh-ik-wuk. They love me.

Ke sakf»h-ik-wuk, They love thee.

2Saki-h-ik(». He is loveil by them.

Xo hakeh-ik-onan-uk, They love us.
Ke sakeh-ik-onow-iik, They love us.
K« sakeh-ik-owow-uk, 'I'hey love you.
Sakeh-iko-wuk, They are loved by hiui

or them*

^^H^^^^^H

TOK VERB. 125 i

Patt Teiue. Direct.

Singular.

Ne «Ve»mtI.

I loved bim.

Ko Mikoh-«tI.

Thou lovodHt him. :

Bak.li-fttl. or

H« loved him.

SiiWoh-ripHii.

Ne sakoli-ata-nan, We loved him.

Ko iwkth-atii-iin-

low, Wel..Tedhim.

Ko «nkd.-at»-wo

w, Ynn loved him. ;

Bakfh-ata-wow

.or They loved him.

Sakeh apun-nk.

'.

riuml.

No Bakcli-nfr-uk,

I lovod them.

K., sakoii-ull-uk.

'i'liDii lovedxt them.

( } 8ak.li-«tl, or

lie loved them. :

Sakcli-u|mn,

'

No enkcli-ata-nn

-Ilk, We loved them.

Ko Bakoh-ata-no

v-Tik, Wa lovea them. ;

Ke »akcli-ato-wow.uk, Yrm lovod thorn. ■

O sAkcli-atA-won

, w They loved thorn.

Sakoh-upun-uk,
Inoa

rw!. Sinirulftr.

Ne Bakch-ik-otI, Ho loved me.

Ke wikoh-ik-otl, Ho love<l thee.

O wikcli-ikKitl, or Ho was loved by him or

Sakch-ik-oimn, ■ them.

Jfo Mkeh-i k-ota-nnn, ITo lovi-d us.

Ke sakch-ik-ota-now. He loved us.

Ke wikeh-ik-ottt-wow. Ho loved you.

>.akeh-ik-otl, or He was loved by him or

Sakeh-ik^opuii, tliem.

Pkral.
Ke Mteh-ik^HMik, T^vo^ \o^«A ^«-
Ke Mteh-ik-oU-ttk, 1^? '^'«*- '^««-

12G THE VERB.

O Rakcli-ik-otI, or He was loved by them.

Sakch-ik-opun,

No 8akeh-ik-4>ta-nan-tik, They lovecl us.

Ko sakch-ik-ota-now-nk. They l«»vcd us.

Ko sakoh ik-ota-wow-uk, They loved you.

O sakeh-ik-ota-wow, or They were loved by hiiii

Sakoh-ik-opun-uk. or them.

Ftrtt and Second Pertons.

Present Tense. Direct.
Ke Kakeh-in, Thou lovest me.

Ke sakeh-in-owow. Yon love me.

Ke sakeh-in-an, Thou lovest us, or you

love us.

Inverse.

Ke sakeh-ittin, 1 love thee.

Ke Hakeh-ittin-owow, I love yon.

Ke sakoh-ittin-an. We love thee or you.

Past Tense. Direct.

Ke sakeh-itti. Thou lovcdst mo.

Ke HJikeh-it-owow, Ynu loved me.

Ke sakch-it-tan, Tliou lovedst us, or you

loved us.

Invei se.

Ko sakeh-ittitl, I loved thee.

Ke sakeh ittit-owow, 1 loved you.

Ke sakeh-itti-tan. We loved thee or you.

Imperative Mood.

Pre§ent Tense.

Singular.

gakeh, Ian^ ^^KvjCsvkVws^^

Akoabe katta aakebftd,

TUB VERB.

127

1

Sakeli-atow,

Sakeh-ik,

Akoshe kuttasakeh&wuk,

Let us love him.

Lovo ye him.

Lot them love him.

Plural.

8;ikch-ik,

Akoshe kutta sakehAo,

Sakeh-at-anuk,

Sakeh-ik-ok,

Akushe kutta sakeh&wuk.

Ix)ve thou them.
liOt him lovo them.
Let us love them.
Ix)ve ye them.
Let them love them.

Sakoh-akun,
S^ikch-akak,
Sakeh-akak,

Sakoli-akunik,

Sakeh-akwawinik,

Sakeh-akakok,

Future Tente.

Singular.

IjOvo thou him.
Let U8 love them.
Love ye him.

Plural.

Love thou them.
Lot U8 love them.
Love ye them.

Sakeh*in,

Sakoh-inan,

Sakeh-ik,

Sakoh-ekun«
Sakeh-ek&k»

First and Second Pencne,

Present Tense.

Love thou me.
Love thou us.
Love ye me or

Future Tense.

Love thou me.
Love ye me.

SuBJUSCTivB Moori.
Preunt Ttnie. Direct.
Singulitr.
Sitltoh-iik, Cnrnt) I lore him.

Siikvli-ut, Tboii love liiui.

Suk.-h-at. II" l"vo l.i.ii. ,

S.lioh-nk-it. We (1 ""'I :') lo^e Lim.

S,ik.-l.-nk, \Vc (I .ui-l 2) luve bim.

S^ihi-li-Ak, ^«" '*"'* him.

Siiki-l.-iit-chilc, or Tiioy lovo bim.

i>ukcU-Kt-wuw,

Plural.
Siik.Ii-nk-ik. (Tlintl I love them.

&ikuli-ut-chik, TUim lovi. them,

yuk.-h-ilt. ]Iul.>voilK-m.

Sakcli-iik-it-ohik, \Vc ( 1 im.l 3j lovo theni.

lH..kdi-uk-ik, Wo (1 nil.! 2) lovo them.

btikfli-Sk-wiik, Y.>ii I'lvo tliem.

8iiki-h-«t-chik, or Thoy lovo them,

aukoli-atwttw,

Iitrerte. Sinpftihir.
Sr»kfli-it. fThiit) ho lovo mo.

liiikehi>.k. ]Iel..vo thee.

S«ki-h.ik-ot, lie w h-vol lor bira.

Hakrh-yiiiult, lie lovo ua (1 and 3).

SaUvh-ittAk. 1I« h'vo u« (1 and 2).

Isiki-li-irti.k. lie lovo y<.u.

Siikeii-ik-«t-chik, or They are lovod hy lum
bakcli-ik-ut-wow, or tliom.

rianil.
»flkcli-it-cliik, m«»,Vj V\*rs Vw* tm:.

&iJioI.-Ms-ik, TVw \<w« W-

Sakcli-e>TimU-clilk.
i)akoh-ittuk-«uk,
Sakch-ittak-wiik,
Sakeh-ik-ot-chik, <t
Sa keb-i k-ot-wo w.

They Ioto db (1 uicl 3).
Tboy love tu (I «nd 3>
They love vou.
^'hey are loved ttjr bin

Puf Tnuc. Dt'ird.

SiDgnIar.

Snkch-tik-epiin,

Sakcli-ut-e|iiiu,

<Sakeh-a.s-]>un,

tiaktli-uk-il'epiiu,

Sakcli-uk-epiiii,

Kakt'h I'lk-epiin,

SukcL-uwait-puii.

I loved him.
Thou loved Bt bim.
Ho lovi'd bim.
Wo(l and 3) lovod him.
Wo (1 niid 2) luved him.
Y<ni loved him.
They loved him.

f Sakeh-uk-ikK!pHn.

i Sakch-uk-wa-iiiiD,
Sakub-ut-wa-titiii.
£>akcli«ij-]>un,
•iakch-uk tiva-pan.
Siikch-uk-wa pun,
Sakcli-uk-wa-jiuii,
Snkeb-awos-puii,

tiakch-is-piin,
Sakeh-i«k-cptin,
Sakbb-ikuti piiii,
Sakeht-yiuult-epun,
jjlakoh - i 1 1 II k-<:i >i I n ,
H&keb-iVnli-y ]tun.

I loved them.

I'boii lovedst them,
llo loved them.
Wo (1 nnd 3) loved them.
Wo (1 and 2) loved th«m.
You loved tliirm.
They loved thorn.

Siugular.
Ho loved me.
Ho loved ibec.
Ho was loved by him.
Ho loved ua(l and 9).
Ho loved lu (l and 2).

130

TUC YEIUI.

Plural.

Sakoh-it- wa-pnii, '

Sakcli-isk-wa-puiiy

•Sakch-iko6-pun,

Siik(>h -cynn)it-wa-pun,

Sakch-i tt I'lk-wa-poii,

Sakeli-ittak-wa-pun,

8akeh-iko-wa8-puu,

They loved mo.
They loved thee.
He is loved by thom«
They loved uh (1 and S\
They loved lis (1 and 2}.
They loved you.
TTif y were loved by him
or them.

Future Ten$e. Direct.

Snkoh-iik-u,

iSakeh-u t-u,

SHkoh-at-A,

Sakeh-iik-it-al,

Sakeh-uk-u,

8al«'ch-uk-wri,

SSakeh-at-wawa,

Sakch-nk-wawil,

Sakeh-ut-wawA,

Sakeh-at A,

8akeh-iik-it-waw&,

SSakeh-11 k-wawA,

Sakch-ak-wawAy

Sakch-at-wawA,

/nMTM*

Sakeh*it-A,

Sakeh-ink-A,

8akeh-ikot-A,

Sakeh-ovumit-A«

Sakih-itt&k-A,

8akeh-itt&k-wA;

JBkkob'ikot'Wavrikp

Singular.

If or >vhen I love hiin.

If thou Jove him.

If ho love him.

If we ( 1 and 3^ love him.

]f we (I and 2) love him.

If you love him.

If they love him.

Plural.

If I love them.

If thoii love them.

If he love th«*m.

If we (1 and 3) love them.

If we ( 1 and 2) love them.

If you love them.

If they love them.

Singular.
If ho love me.
If he love thee.
If he 18 loved by him.
If he love us (1 and 3).
If he love uh ^V ^^^*iS*

S^keli-it-nawfi, If they lovo mo.

Saketi-Uk-wawA, If they love thee

{iakeh-iWot-u. If he in loved by them.

Sakoh-ej-miiit-wawH, I f tlicy love tu (1 and 3^.

Sakeh-ittAk-wftwfj, if they love n> (1 and 3).

MBkeh-irtAk-wawn, If they love you.

Sakeh-ikot-w-awu, If they ore loved by them.

Firwt and Second Pcrtoiu.

Proaont TenM. Direct
Sakeh-cvun, Thou lovcst me.

Hakeh-oyak, Thou lovest na, or you

lovo UB.

H.T,kcli-pjrik, Vou lovo «8.

luvcrsc.
Sakoli-ittnii, I lovo thee.

Sakch-ftiftk-wuk, 1 love yon.

Kafcch-ittofc, We lovo thco or you.

Past Tonae. Direct
Sakeh-oyu-puii, Thou lovcdat me.

Sakoh-eyak-opuii, Thou lovedbt us.

.■Sakch-eyt'ik-cpuu, You loved mo.

InvorHO.
Sakoh-iMa-puu, 1 loved th«!.

yakeh-ittak-wuk^opUD, 1 loved you.
tiakeh-ittak-opuu, Wo lovod thee or j-ou.

Future Teneo. Direct
Sflkoh-oyun-4, If thou lovo me.

i?«ieh-evftk-a, \U\wiV>-!*-^

132 THE VKHO.

Inverse.

Sakca-ittan-u, If I love thee.

Sakch-ittak-wuk-a, If I love you.

Sakeh-ittak-wa, If we love thee or you.

liEFLECTlVi: FOR.M.

Indicative Mood.

PrcMcnt TcNM.
Singular.

1. Ne bJikch-ittisoD, I love myself.

2. Kc Mlkch-itti^on, Thou lovest thyself.

3. An. Makeh-ittiso, lie loves himself.
Inan. Sakeh-ittibo-ma- It loves itself.

kun.
Pees. An. Sakcli-ittii!0-li- His him loves him-

wu, self.

„ Inan. »Sake1i-ittiHO-ma- His it loves itself,
kiin-ilew.

Plural.

1.]] Ne snkch-ittiso- We (1 and 3) love

nan, ourselves.

1. Ke sakeh-ittiso- Do. (1 and 2).

nanow,

2. Ke Hak««h-iitiM>- You love your-

nawow, selves.

3. An. Sakeh-ittiso wuky They love them-

selves.
Inan. Sakeh-ittisoma- Do.

kunwH«
Pocs. An • Sakeh-ittisoli wa, Hia tl\^m.Vs^^>Xivi«v-

kuniliwa.

THE VERB. 133

Subjunctive Mood.

Preaent Tenter
Singular.

1. * Sakob-ittisoyan, (If) I love myself.

2. Sakoh-ittisoyiuiy Thou love thyselfl

3. An. Sakeh-itti80t«- Ho love hiinadlf.
Inan. Sftkeh-ittisoma- It lovo itself.

kuk,
Poss. An. Sakeh-ittisoliche, His him love him-
self.
„ Inan. Sakeh-ittisoma- His it, etc. -
kunilik,

rinral.

I. Sakeh-ittisoyak, Wo (1 and 3) love

oursolves.

1. Sakch-ittLBoyiik, Do. (1 and 2).

2. Sakch-ittisoyuk, You lovo your '

solves.

3. An. Sakch-ittisochik, They love thcm-

solves.
Inan. Sakeh -ittisoma- Do.

kuke,
Poss. An. Sakoh-ittisoliche, His them love

themselves.
„ Inan. Sakeh - ittisoma- Do.
kuniliko,

Indeterminate Penon$.
Indicative Mood.
Present Tente*
iSalceh-ittiso-nanovrun^ People ore loving )

Itel. fliiioh-itti80-nanewm\\o^. ^£>^ \?^ tiS^^^wso. v. n

^

N

134 THE VECB.

Pa$t Tcn$e.

Sakch-lttiiK>nano>vun*opan, Pcoplo were loving

tlicinselves.
liel. Sakoli-ittiftiniiiiowunil-cpiin, Do. in relation to

others.

SniFUNCTlVE ^[oou.

Present Ten$c,

Sakcli-ittisoniincwnk, People are loving

theinselves.
Bel. Sakch-ittisonancwunilik, Do. in relation to

others.
Past TenK.

Sakeh-ittisonano\vuk-G]»un, reoplo were, etc. •
Bel. »Sakeli-ittiiionaue%\'iinilik-epnn.

lirc[ri:ocAL Form.

Indicative Mood.
Prevent Tenee.

Plural.

1. Ne sakeh-itto- We (1 and 3) lovo

nan, each other.

1. Ko Kakeh - itto- Do. (1 and 2).

nanow,

2. Ke (<akch - itto- Yon love each other.

nawow,

3. An. Sakeh-ittowuk, They love each other,
inan. Sakeh - ittoma- Do.

knnwa,
Poss. An. Sakoh-itto\iw%, 13\a ^I^visl^ ^\<^
ff Inan. Sakeh • ittoma- I>o*

kitniliwa.

THE TERD. 135

SuBjuNcrivs Moon. i

Preaeni TeiMe.

I

Plural. ;

1. Sakoh-ittojak, Wo (1 and 3) love

each othov. *

1. Sakeh-ittoyuk, We (1 and 2) Iot*

eaoli other.; |

2. Sakoh-ittoyak, You love each othei:. I

3. An. Sakeh-ittochikf Theyloveeaohothet.
Inan. Sakch - ittoma- Do.

kukc,
Poss. An. Sakeh-ittoliche, His them« etc. ;

Inan. Sakoh - ittoma- Do.
kuniliko.

t»

Indeterminate Penoiit. '

Indicative Mood.

Present Tense.

Sakoh-ittonanewun, People are loTing

each other.

licl. Sakeh-ittonanowunilow.

I

Paat Tense.

Sakeh-ittonanewun-opun, People were» etc
Bel. Sakeh-ittonanowunil-epun.

Subjunctive Mood.

Present Tense.

Sakch-ittonanewuk.
SeL Sakeh-ittonanexnuiVtik*

Poil Te»«c. '-^ \

IM

Sakeh.ittonanevruV-«VMv.
. S*keh.ittonanewum\^-*V«^

\
\

136

TH£ VKUIU

Inanimate Form. Sakotow, lie loves it

Indicative I^Iood.

Prtteni TenMc. Direct

Sing^ilar.

I lovo it or then).
Thou lovcst it.
He loves it.

Plural.

Wo (1 and 3) love it.
AVo (1 and 2) love it.
You love it.
They lovo it.

Singular.

It loves me, or thoy love

nie.
It loves thee.
It loves him.

Plural.

Nesaket-an/
Ke saket-an,
Saket-ow,

No saket-anan,
Ke saket-ananovr,
Ke saket-anowow,
SaJcet-owuk,

Inverts
Ke »ukoh-ik-on,

Ke sakeh-ik-on,
Sdioh-iko,

Ne sakeh-ik-onau,
Ko sakch-ik-onanuw,
Ke sakeh-ik-onawow,
Sakeh-ik*owuk,

It loves us ^1 and Z\
It loves us \l and 2),
It loves you.
It loves them.

SuBjONcnvE Mood.

Prsfeni Ten$e. Dtrtei^

8ing;uiax«

THE VEBB.

137

Saket-ayak,
Saket-ajuk,
Saket-ayuk,
Saket-archik,

Sakeb-ik-oyan,
Sakeh-ik-oyiiny
Sakoh-ik-ot,

.Sakoh-ik-oyak,
Sakoh-ik-oyuk,
^keh-ik-oyilk,
•Sakch-it-otchik,

Saket-a,

Akoshe kutta sakotow,

»Sakot-atow,

Saket-ak,

Akosho kutta 8akoto>vuk,

Plnral.

(If) we (1 and 8) love iU
We (1 and 2) love it.
You love it.
They love it.

Inwene. Singular.

(If) it love me.
It love thee.
It love him.

Plural,

(If) it love U8 (1 and 3).
it love U8 (1 and 2).
It love you.
It love them.

Imperative Mood.

Present Tense.

Love thou it.
Let him love it.
Let ua love it.
Love ye it.
Let them love it.

Saketa-kuu,
Saketa-kak,
Saketa-kak,

Future.

Love thou it.
Let us love it.
Love ye it.

Indeteruixate Object.

An. Sakeh-ewau,
Inan. Soke-chekao,

. The inanimate form ot ^3ai* ^^^^"^"^^
fittle OMd ; bat from «eta.vfeV«te»«, ^'^

^%

\ssv\.

\

138

THE VERD.

1.

2.

8. An.

Inao.

to grow; Netaweketow, he cau^s it to grow, wo
obtain Notawekichekuo, lie makes a growing, ho
cultivates.

Sakehowao is an intransitive verb of tho third
conjugation.

Sakecbekud is likewise of the third conjugation.

Netawekichekuu, ho cultivates.

Indicative Mood.

Prucnt Tense.

Singular.

Nenetawekichck-an, I cultivate.
Ke nctawokichck-an, Thou cultivatestv
Netawckichok-ao, He cultivates.
Netawekichok-Ama- It cultivates,
kun,
Poss. An. Netiiwckichek-uli- His him culti*

wa, vatcs.

„ Inan. Xetawekichck-uma- His it cultivates,
kuuilcw.

Plural.

No netawekichek-

anan,
Ee notawekichck«

ananow,
Ke netawckichck-

unowow,
Nctawekichek-

i&wuk,
Notawi*kic\ieV-

&mak\iii-^a.

1.
1.
2.

3. An.
Inan.

We (1 and 3)

cultivate.
Do. (1 and 2).

•

You cultivate. .
They cultivate.

* Pern. An. KotawoViche\L.iV\. ia» «ws«^

e^^

»• Inn. N6tawekiobff!k^^&»<* '^^ _

THE VERB. 1^ I

Passive Voice. j

Fushewuo, Ho brings him* !

Put-oWy He brings it. !

I select this verb becanse it has a different
from nearly all the other verbis in this oonjugatiioii,
iriiO appearing more like one of the third than oT
the second, and therefore calculated to pmsde *
learner ; but its terminations are quite regular.

*

t
f

*

Indicative Mood. « *

Present Ten$e, j

Singular. \

1. No pushcw-ik-owin, I am brought.

-. Ke pashew-ik-owin, Thou art brought. ;

.*». An. Pu«hew-ow, or j

Pashow-akunowew, He is broushi.
Inan. Put-anewun, It is brought.

Poss. An. Pushcw-aliwii, or »

Pushew-akunewiliwa. i

„ Inan. IVit-anewunilew. t

Plural. »

i. Ne pishew-ik-owin-an, We (1 and S)* J

are brought*
I • Ko pashew-ik-owin-anow, (1 and 2.)

-. Ke pushew-ik-owin-awow.

/• An. Pa8hovr-oN?-\xV, or

P»tehevrK>kuxievjc'w\^
Juan. Pfit-anowuxi-^a.

Poaa. An. raabew-aU^^w

i40 THE VEliD.

Past Ten9€.

Singular.

1. Xe pusbow-ik-ow-itf, I was brought.

2. Ke pilshow-ik-ow-itr.

3. An. O pfuihew-atl, or

Pusliew-afinn, or
l*ashow-akunewe-puD.
Inao. Put-ancwnn-opun.

* PoiB. An. Pilshew-ulcpun, or

Piisbcw-akuiicwil-epun.
,9 Inan. Put-ane%vui)il-epuD.

Plural.

1. No pasbow-ik-ow-ita- We (1 and 8)

nan, worebrongbt.

1. Kc pu«hcw-ik-ow-itananow, (1 and 2.)

"2. Ke piUbow-ikHiw-iiowow,

3. An. pu«hew-ik-ow, or

PrL8bow-a]»un-uk, or
PiUbew-akiinowe-pun-uk.
Inan. Pdt-anewun-opun-wa.

Pom. An. Prishew-alcpun, or

Pilsbcw-Mkunuwele-puu.
yy Inan. Put-aniswunilewapun.

SuDJu:(CTiTE Mood.

PretcHt Tenie,

Singular.

/. Pa8hew.\VH>>w-«j«a^^Ji^^-«a^'^s««^'^SP^

^ An. Pusbew-it, or

Paah^w-aVuikC^Vt*

TUE VEllU.

141

r<itt8. Au« PuHhew-iliche, or

Pufilic w-ak 11 1 ic wilioke.
luaiL Put-anewunilik.

»•

1.
1.

An.

Inan.
Pass. An.

1.

•»

•»

'*'. ill}.

Plural.

Pushcw-ik-ow-ojaky We (1 and 3) am

bronght.
PuHhcw-ik-ow-eynk, (1 and 2.)
Pasliew-ikH • w-cyiik.
Pu8l)0w-it-chik, or
pHshc Wiuk 11 no wi t-chik.
Put-anowiik-c.
Pusliow-ilifhc, or
Pushcw-ak n nr wilicbc.
., Inan. Put-anewunilik-c.

Past Tentc.

Singular.

Pfishcw-ik-ow-eya- (If) Iwcro brought.

pan,
Pashew-ik-ow-cya- (If) thon wcrt
]>un, brought.

An. Pn«hcw-iH-pnn, or

Pashew-akunowis-puu.
Inan. Put-anewuk-cpun, or

Pat-anewiini»ko-punu.
Po88. An. Pa^hew-alis-pun, or

IMsh e w-ak u ne w il is-pu n .
„ Inan. Pat-anowunclik-^pun.

Plural.
Pa8hcw-\k-iAV-^^;j^-^\fvsAv V> *aA^>\

Paiihuw-c>va».T>\vTi,oT .

Pil8hotv-akuii%:v:ex»WrV^^

142 TIIR VERB.

3. Inan. Put-anewuk-wa-pun, or

Pjlt-aiiowunowako-puniU
PoiB. An. Piwhew-aliwas-pun, or

Puslie w-akun e wiliA\-a8-pan.
„ Inon Prit-anowunilik-wa-pon.

Fatnre Tcme.
Singular.

1. Pusliew-ik-ow-oyan-Ti, When am 1

brouglit.

2. Pushew-ik-ow-cyun-H.

3. An. l*asliow-it-ri, or

Pashcw-akuncwit-u.
Inan. Put-anowuk-ri.

Po68. An. Piwhow-alit-u, or

JVi8liow-akinie\viIit-u.
„ Inan. Pat-anowunilik-u.

mural.

1. Pusliow-ik-ow-cyak-a, When we (land

3) are brought.

1. IVishcw-ik-ow-cyuk-A, (1 and 2.)

2. PrM*licw-ik-ow-e> uk-wu.

3. An. IViKhew-it-wawa, or

Pjwhe w-ak un u wi t-wa wa .
Inan. Pat-anewuk-wawu.

Poss. An. Pashuw-ilit-wawa, or

PaMhew-ak une wi li t- wawu .
,, Inan. Put-ant wunilik-wawa.

From Sakehuu wo obtain the following nouns and
verbal adjectives.

&ikohowilwin, "Lo^c QociXtt^^K^*

^kebikowin, or , .^

THE VERB. 143

Salccliittisowiiif Self-Io^e. |

Sakehittowin, Keciprocal love. •

Sakeliakun, A lover (a person loved), j

Verbal Aixjectives.

Sakehcw-uwiBeWy He is lovinff.
SakeliikoseWy He is lovable.

Both of these are intransitive verbs of the first
conjugation, and are therefore subject to all the
modiftcations explained in the chapter on Id transi-
tive Verbs.

THE THIRD CONJUGATION.

The tciTTiinations of verbs of this conjugation are.
An. lad, mcio, ncio, tiio^ and tcrlo ; Inan. urn, preceded
by its distinctive letter.

Those ending in hVi, mai), and mlo are all regular*
uiid arc a)ningate<l as those of the second conjuga-
tion; the ctnly difference being in the inanimate
diicct form, which resembles an ir. transitive verb of
the sixth, instead of the second conjugation.

Wapatum, he sees it, like Italitum, he thinks.

Verbs in tad change the t into sh in the first

person hingnlar inverse of the tsnbjunctive mood«

and the fii'6t person (1 and 3^ \iluval in some of the

peifiona of the impoiaWvo tvv^^ ^^^ vcv ^^ \^«

traDsitivo foiin, or ver\> vrVtiv VueL^lerroivMC^ ^>p5:Jw

A'uKwat-um*

Xo piiliH'ut-ow,

Ke ]Hikwnt'Ow,

Pnkwat-fiiH

No piikivnt-anan,

Ko piikw&t-anaitn'

Ko piikwnt-owow,

Pukwat-HWiik,

So pnk»iit-o\v-iik,
Ko imkwnt-ow-uk,

I»HkwIlt-HO.

Ko pukwatanan-iik.
Ko puk«-ut-anow-uk,
Ke pnkwnt-owow-uk,
Pnkwat-i'iwuk,

Iitrerte.
No puk«nt-ik,
Ke piikwat-ik,
riikwat-iko,
Ke piikwat-ik-on-iTi.
Ho ptikwnt ik-OHow,
Ko piiknat-ik-owo«',
Pukw»t-iko-wiik,

Xo piikwnt-ik-wnV,
Ko pnkwnt-ik-wnk.
Talivat-iko.

S'e pnkvrat'ik-oiiftn-uV,
Ko pukwitt-ik-onow-uV.,
ifo /(nkn-nt-ik-oTCONe-uW,
i'ui.-Mnt-iko-wuk,

THE VEnn.

IsMCATtvE Mood.

Pr«»aU Tettte. Direct.

Singular.

I h^tto I)im.

Thon hnicat hitu.

Bo hates him.

Wo ( 1 and 3) hate him.

Wo (1 anil 2) hate him.

Ton hato hiiu.

They hate him.
rinrnl.

I hnto thorn.

Thciii hatcftt them.

lie hate^ thorn.

Wo hato thim.

We hnto them.

Ynii hate them.

They hato tdem.
Singular.

Ho hHtca me.

llu iiatOH thee.

Ho in ha'cd by him.

Ho hutcw na.

Ho hates us.

\\<i hates yuu.

1'hcy nro bated by him,
Hunil.

Ther hate mo.

'J 'hey Iiate thee.

1 W^ »

^•^iii^^'*

THE \'ERII. 145

Fint and Second Penou: \

Present Tcdbc. Direct. >

Kc pukwa^/i-in. Thou hateet mo.

Ko piikwa«/«-in-an« Thou batcst us, or yoa

hate 118.
Ke pukwofi-in-owow. You hate nic.

InTcrso. '

Ke pukwat-ittiiu I hate thee. \

Kc pukwat-ittin-owow, 1 hate you. '

Ko pukwat-ittiii-an. Wo hate thee or you. ;

•

Imperative Mooi>.

Singular.

Vwliw'ailiy Hate thou him.

Akoshe kutta pukwatao, Let him hate him.

Pukwat-utow, Let us hate him. !

[|ukwa9A-ik, Hate ye him.

Akoshe kutta pukwat- Let them hato him.
awuk, ;

Plural.

Pnkwat-ik, Hate thou them.

Akoshe kutta pukwatmi, liOt him hate them. \

l*ukwat-at-auuk. Let us hato thenu \

Pukwat-ik-oky Hato ve them. !

.Vkoshe kutta pukwat- Let them hate them. j
uwuk,

Fint and Second PenoM.

Pnkvra$h-in, ^*^<» ^V"^ ""^

Pukxrath-inan, ^k^* ^^"^^or x^

TUE VbUB.

SuaiDKCTivK Moon.
Pmmt Taue. Direct

Piilcwat-nk,
Pakwat-nt,
■pakwat-at,
PnfcwiiMik-it,
Piikwnt-iik,
Pukuat-ilk,
PukwHt-nt-cliik, i
Pule wa t-at- wow.

Piikwat-iik-ik,

l*ulnvat-iit-cbik,

Pukwal-al,

r.ikwat-iik-it-ohik,

rnkwnl-iik-ik.

l'ukwut-.-,k-wuk,

I'ukwat^t-chik, or

Pnkwat-at-wow,

fnkw<.«A-it,
Piikwat-isk,
Piikwnt-ik-ot,
[*u kwawl -cv limit,
Piikw..t-ittiik,
INikwat-Utnk.
Pukw.it-ik-ot-cbiIt,«r
Puk H-at-ik-ut-wow,

Singular.

(That) I hato him.

Tbon bato him.

Be hato bim.

'We (I and 3) hate him.

Wo (I and 2) hato bim.

Yon batehira.

'lliey hato him.

Floral.

(Tliat) I bate them.

Tboii hato ihcm.

Ho hnUy tlicni.

Wo (I and Sjhatetboiu.

Wo ( 1 nnd 2) bate thorn.

You bmo them.

They hate tbem.

Sin)^)1ar.
lie liatcs me.
He bates thee.
He is lifttcd by bim.
He (I and 3) liatea us.
He (I aud 2) bates ua.
Ho hittcs you.

at ^tiai.

THE VERB.

147

I

Pukwat-ik-ot,

rnkwa«/i-eyuinlt-chik,
Pukwat-itruk-wnk,
Pnkwat-ittak-wuk,
PukwHt-ik-ot-cbik, or
Pukwat-ik-ot-wow,

Ho is hated by him or

them.
Iliey (1 and 3) hato vm.
They (1 and 2) bate iia.
Thoy liato von.
lliey are hated by him

or them.

Fir$t and Second Persont.
Present Tense. Direct.

[hikwa«/«-oyun,
Pukwa«^-evak,

Pukwat/i-oyak,

Pakwat-ittan,

Pukwat-fttak-wuk,

Pnkwat-ittaky

Thou hatcst uic.

Thou hatest us, or you

hate us.
You hato us.

Inverse.

I hato thco.

I hato you.

Wo huto thco or you.

Keflective Fonif.

Indicative Mood. Present Tense.
Xo pukwat-ittison, I hato myself, etc.

Reciprocal Form.

Indicativk ^Iood. Present Tense.

No pukwat-ittonan. We (1 and 3) hate each

other, etc.

Indeterminate Object.
An. Pukwcuh-avfwi. lX<^>aa\^s&-

AlaJcopit-iuu,

i

1 48 THE VERB.

Passive Voice.

An. I 'nkwat-ow, or

riikwat-nkuDcwow, lie is hatetl.

Juau. i Sikwat-chekatau, It is hatoil.
All. 3Iakopit-o\\% or

Makopit-akuiicwew, lie is tied.

.Mako[»i(t)-clickatar), It is titnl.

Moi»t verlis in truu of this conju<j^tiou contnict
tho toriii illation oicik into dk in tlio invorso form of
the imlicativo mood, and in Komo of tho persons of
the ini]H;rativc* luuod ; also tho owi into a in some*
of tho |)ersons of tho suhjunctivo mood.

Otisliko\vokaiK)wcstow-ai», ho stands before him.

I.e. facioj^ him.

Indicative Mood.

Prcwnt Tcn9c. Direct,

Singuktr.

Net otihh kowokapowestow-ow.
Kct otishko\vekapo\vestow-ow.
Otishkowoka] K) westow-aii.
Net otishkowekapowcstow-anan.
Ket otishkowckai)o\vestuw-unanow.
Kft otifthko\vckaiK>wcstow-o\vo\v,
Ut ishkowekuiM)Wi*stow-awuk.

I'lural.

Net ot ishko wokapo wcstow-ow-uk.

Ket otishko\voka2x>westow-ow-uk.

Otishkowcka\x»iVQi^tON\-&o«

Net otitthko^oka\>ONt^vo\\-QSi^'a-\&L.

Kct otUhkovrfsVa\*o\v^\o\H-WMj>Hi-"^*

Xot oti»bko\voVu\\%ONfeiXo>M-wiwi->^*

TIJK VKUri.

i49

1

Iwccrse. iSingiilar.

Not otishkowokapi^wcst-ak.

Ket otishkowokapiwcst-ak.

Otislikowckapowest-ako.

Net oti8hkowckaix)we8t-ak-onan.

Ket otiB]ikowckaix)we8t-ak-onaiiow«

Ket oti8likowcka])owe8t-ak-6wow.

0ti8hkowcka|>owc8t-ak-ownk.

Not utisbkowokapowcst-ak-wiik.

Kot ot]8hkoweka]X)\ve8t-ak-wuk.

0ti8hkowckapowc8t-ako.

Not otishkowckapowest-ak-onan-iik.

Kot otishkowckapowost-ak-onow-uk.

Kot oti8hkowekaix)wo8t-ak-owow-uk.

0ti8hkowekapo\vcst-ako-wuk.

First and Second Pcrsong,

Present Tonse. Direct.
Kot otibIikowokaiX)WONtow-iD,

Kot otishkowckapowestow-in-
aD,

Kot otishkowokapowesto'w-in-
owow,

lnvoi*80.

]vet otishkowokapowest-n/^in,
Ket oti8hkowekapowo8t-a//in-

owoyv,
Kot otinhkowokapo^eHt-aUvii*

Tliou standest be-
foro me.

Thou standest Ix^
foro us, or you
stand before U8.

You stand befoi'o

UH.

I stand l)oforo tlioe.
I stand beforo you.

jr»o

TUK VKKIU

iMPEnATivE Mood.

Singular.
Otihliko\vcku})owc8tow,

Stand thoa Leforcv
^ him.

Akof»lic kniti otishkowekapow- Lot liim staBd bo-

OKtow-fn'i,
Otinhkcwekapowcstow^atow,

Otii«likowekaiH>wc8tow.ik,

fore him.
Let 118 btand l)efoi*o
him.

Stand 70 before^
^ him.

.VkoHlio kiitta otifllikowckapow- Let them stand 1x)-
CHtow-awuk,

foro him.

Plural.
( )ti8hkoweku|K)weKtow-ik,

Stand thou hoforo
^ them.

Akotihe kiitta otishkowekapow- Let him stand bo-

e8tow-a«i, foro them.

OtiMhkowokapowestow-at-anuky Lot iih 8tand boforu

them.
OtishkowckapiAvest-ak-ok,

Stand yo before
^ them.

Akosho kutta otishkowekapow- Let them stand
ostow-iiwuk, beforo them.

Finl and Secoud Per$on8.
Otishkowekapowestow-in,

Otishkowekapowestow-in-an,
CMMliIroirek^powestowAk,

Stand then before

me.
Stand thou befolc^

>^«

or v*'*

SODJUHCTtrE MoM).
Prtaeitt Teiue. LirecL

Otishkowekai wives to w-utc, (That) I atand be>

fonhim.
( J ti ehko wokn I w wcs to w- 1 1 1.

tUhk owekaiw wcstuw-at.
(Jtishkoweku]^)oweBtow-uk-it, ' We (1 (uid 3) (tuid

befomhiin.
( )tit)IikowokaiN>wGBtow-uk. 'Wfl(litiid2) iteod

before him.

1 isli kow e k« po westoiv-ti k.
Otishkoweku|)oWfBtow-nt-chik.

PluTttl.

Otishkowokapowcstyw-uk-ik,

O t isli ko we kn po WOK to w-u t-cl 1 i k ,
O t iiihko WD ku[io wcHto w -It t.
Otixhkowckci poivcs to w-uk-i t-chik.
O tishko wtj kapo weB 1 w-nk-i k.
Otish ko wckapo wosto w -uk- w)ik.
Otishkowekaijowcstow-at-chik, or
tish kowcknpowtBto w-«t- wo w.

Interte. SiDf^olar.
tishko wekapowc8t-ow- it, (Tliat) be etaod

before me^
O ti Bbko wc kiii>owc8t-ask .
OtiBhkowckaiKjwcHt-ak-ot,
OtiRhkowoka ])o wost-o w-ey m u i t.
Otish to wfikapo went-aUnk.
Ot/eiiowekapowesl-tttleLfe.
Od'aiitowekapowest^-ftk-ot-ciMV, w
Oi/HiiJ(owokai>owe«t-«V-oi-"'Q'w.

152

THE VEKD.

Plural.

Otibljko\vokap()WC8t-ow-it-oliik» (That) tboy Mtuml

bcforo me.
O tiiihkowckaix) wc8t-a8k-ik.
t) tiKli ki>wckap<i woBt-iik-ot.
Oti8hk« nvekaiK>wc8t-ow-o3nitni t-

chik.
OtishkowekapowcNt-^ittiik-wiik.
OtishkuwokapowcKt-uttuk-wuk, Tlioy btand bcfon*

you.
Otifihkowokapowc8t-Ak-ot-chiky or
Otishkowokapiiwost-akHit-wow.

Tint and Second Peroom.

Direct.
Otiijhkowekaix)WCHtow-eyim,

OtiKhki f weka p< )wc«to w-eya k.

OtittbkowokaiM iwcHtow-oyuk,

Inverso.
OtiiihkowekaiM)Wci»t-attan,

(Tliat) thou stand

before me.
Thou stand befoix*

U8, or you stand

before us.
You stand before

us.

(That) I stand be-
fore thee.

Otishkowekapowest-dttak-vruk, I stand bcforo you.

Otishkowekapowest-attaky We stand before

thee or you.

REFLKcmrB Form.
Lvdicahvk Mood. Preieult T€«m%
Xot otidblrowokapoTreBt-aaBcm^ \ m\»A\5K&«^

THE VERB.

1^

Reciprocal Form.

Indicative Mood. Pregent Ten§e.

Net otisbkowckapowcst-atto- Wo stand beford

nan,

each other.

In tho Kiimo mannor aro conjogatcd Dative Verbis
when the object in inanimate, and also Yicarions
Verbs; thus,

< )6hct-iimowuii,
Ayumehrist-uniowrio,
Net oshet-umak,
Net ayiimeliHHt-uinak,
Net oshct-nmasoii,
Net ayumchust-umason,
Not oshet-um-attonan,
Not ayumeliust-um-atto-
nan.

He makoH it for him.
He pra3*8 for him.
Ho makes it for mo.
Ho prays for me.
I make it for myself.
I pray for myself.
We make it for each other.
Wo pray for each other.

Dativk Verbs with Animate Object.

As already stated, in practice, the distinction be-
tween animate and inanimate is not much attended
to, but as both fonns aro in constant use, it is
nccessaiy that tlie animate should bo given, and
:ioquired by tho student. It is a little j^eculiar, and
will therefore require the moro attention.

Pii-towud,
Oshe-towAo,

Ho brings him to hinu
He makes him for him.

Indicative Mood.
Pretent Teiue. Dwect,

Abt oshctow-4)\v,
f^et as2ietow-i»w.

154

THE VEKII.

Oshetow-uii,

Not osliotow-anau,

Kot osbotow-ananow,

He makes him for him.
AVo (1 ami 3) luako him

for bim.
Wo (1 and 2) make him
for him.

Ket oshotow-anowow, Yo make him for him.

Oshotow-awuk, They make him for him.

Plural.

Net Cfihetow-ow-uk, I mako him for them.

Ket oshotow-ow-uk,

Thou makest him for

them,
lie makcH him for them.
AVo (1 and 3) make him

for them.
Wo ( 1 and 2) make him

for them.
Ket oshetow-anowow-nk. You mako him for them.

Oshctow-aii,

Not onhetow-anan-uk,

Ket OHhoto\v-anow-uk»

0«hctow-u\vuk,

Kot oiihetw-ak,
Kot ofihctw-ak,
Oshctw-ako,

They make him for
them.

Invene. Singular.

Kot Otthctw-ak-onan,

Ket Otthctw-ak-onanow,

Kot Ofihotw-ak-owoWy
Oshotw-ako-wuky

lie makes him for me.
Ho makes him for thee.
He is made for him by

him.
Ho makes him for us (1

and 3)-
Ho makes him for us ( I

and 2).
Ho makes him for you.
Ho is made for them by

Ho ut made fur Min
them.
Net otiliulw-ak-ouan-uk. They mnkc liim for i

(1 and 3). ,

Kot oshctw-ak-onow-uk. They mako him for vm\

(1 and 2).
Kot oehotw-ak-owow-uk, They mako him for you.
OBhotw-ako-wuk, Ho is mado for tkfim by

thorn.

Firit aiid Second Pertoni. ^

FrcKont Tense. Direct. I

Eot OBhotow-in, Ttum luakcst him for ma.

Kot oehotoir-ia-uti, Thoii ronkcbt him for ua, :

or \(iu mikko hiia for

UH.

Ket Odhctuw-in-owow, You mnku him for mc.

Inverse.
Kct oshutw-attiu, I make him for thee.

K«t oa))clw-attiii-owow, I mako him for you.
Ket o6hotw-attin-an, Wo mako him for thcd

or you.

Impeiutivs Mood.

Siu^lar.

Oahotow, Maki) thou him for Um.

Akosho kutta oHhctowiii), Let liim mako lum for

him.

Oabctow-atow, 1^^ 'u&^o&Vii'tun^fQT Uiau

*fithctow-ik. ■NUV«'3ttV\m.WW

Aktmhc JcutU ublictow.V ^^ *^^^ ^"^ ^^

'150

Tins VEnu.

Ouhctw-ak,

Akoslio kutta oslictowuo,

Oslietow-at-aiiuk,

Oiihotw-ak-ok,
Akonho kutta o«hotow-
ilwuky

Plural.

Make thou him for thcni.
Lot him make him for

them.
J^'t UH make him for

tlicm.
Make ye him ft)r them.
Let tliem make him for

tliem.

Fint and Second Pcr$on8.

<)shctow-in. Make thou him for me.

Oshctow-inan, Mako thuu him for U8.

Oshetow-ik,

Otfhetow-uk«

KMietow-ut,
Oshctow-at,
Oashctow-uk*it»

Ovhetow-uk,

Odictow-uk,
Oshctow-at-chik,

Oifbetow-uk-ik,
OMhetow-At,

Mako ye him for mo or

UK.
SUBJUNCTIVK MOOD.

Pruent Tense. Direct.
Singular.

(That) I make liim for

liim.
Thou mako him for him.
IFo make him for liim.
"We (1 and •\) make him

for him.
We (1 anil 2) make him

fur him.
You make him for him.
They mako him for him.

Plural.

TOE VKKlk

157

i )Hliotow-uk-it-cliiky
i )8hctow-iik-ik9

( )8hetow-uk,
< >sketow-at-oh]k,

Vfe (1 and «)) mako liim for

thcni.
Wo (1 and 2) mako liim for

them.
Yon mako liim for thcnu
riu'V make him for them*

ri«

Iiwene. Singnhir.

i )«hcto\v-it,

i )Hhet\v-a8k,

i )Khet\v-akot,

( >8h<'to\v-cynmit,

Ohhftw-atuk,

OKbotw-atak,

< )Khetw-ak<»t-cliik,

Ohhct(»\v-it-chik,

( )8hctw-aKk-ik,

< >8hetw-akc>t,

( )8hetow-cyumit-chik,
4J6hctw-atuk-wuk,

< )8het\v-atak-wuk,

< >8hetw-akot-chik.

(That) he mako him for mc«
lie make him for thee.
He be inado for him by him^
lie bo made for him by us*
He bo made for him by us.
He bo mado for him by you.
Ho be made for them by
him.

Phu-al.

(That) they make him for

mc.
Thoy make him for thee.
1 To bo mado for him by thenu
They mako him for us.
Thoy make him for us.
Thvy mako him fur you.
Ho be made for them by

them.

fV

Ist and 2nd Persons,
Present Tense. Dircet

(>»Lctow-c7un,

Osbctow-ayak^

0»hctow-cy&1Cf

(That) thou make him for
T\\ou \xw)\yi VwfiL \iQSt ^ask^ «r
Xou Tv\iNyi Vwsv i^x \».

i

t

I

I

<.

\

158 THE VERB.

InverHc.

Oshot w-attan, (That) T make him for thco.

O8hotw-attak-wuky I luako him for you.

Oshotw-attak, Wo mako him for thcc or

you.

Reflective Form.

Indicative Mood. Present Tentc.

iSinguLnr.

Xct ofihotw-asson, I make Iiim for mysolf.

Kot 06hotw-a88on, Thou makcst him for th}'-

KOlf.

Oshctw-assOy Ho makes him for himself.

rinial.

Net oshctw-asson-au. We (1 and 3) mako him

for oui*8clve8.

Ket oehotw-asson-anow. Wo (1 and 2) mako him

for on I solves.

Kct ofihctw-asson-owow, Tou mako him for yonr-

>ielvf8.

Oxhctw-asso-wukt Thoy mako him for them-

selves.

Srcipiiocal Form.

Ikdicative Mood. Tresent Tense.

Plural.

Net ofihctw-attonau* Wo (1 and 3) mako him

for each other.
Kct ofihctw-attonanow. Wo (1 and 2) make him.

Kct oshotw-attonowo^^ "^ow \ti«>wi Vvxw Vst. ^s»r^
OrfietWHtttowuV, 1W^ ^^^ ^^^

Tassive Voice.

IsoiCATivE Sloon, Pruent Tense.

Singular.

Ket oshctw-flk-owiii. Ho is mndo for mc.

Ect oshctw-ak-owin, Ho is mudo for thcc.

Oshctow-ow, or

OshutuW'akunowcw, Ho ie made for him.
PooB. OKliotow-aliwn, or

Oshctuw-akuncwiliwa, Ho is mndo for Ms him.

riui^.
Net <«hotw-uk-owiu- Ho is iiiado for ua (1

nn, and 3).

Ket oehctw-ak-owjn- Ho is mndo for us (1

iinuw, _ and 2).

Ket oslictw-nk-iiwiu- lie ia made for you.

Oslietow-ow-iik, or

O'-lK-tow-ukiuicwcw-ulc. Ho is made fur thorn.
Poes. OGlietow-allwa, or Ho is madu for hiaj

Oshutow-ukuncwiliwa, them. _3B

SmuONCTiVE SIoou. Presetit Tenae. ^^|
Singular. ^^1

Oeliotw-ak-ow-cyan, (That) he be made for

Oahotw-ak-owK;j-iin, Ho 1)0 mode for thcc.
Gal 10 tow -it, IT

Oslioiow-akuncwit, He bo made for him.
I'otB. OwJic'ow-ilicbc. or

OfiJlotow-akunc wiVic\ni,tia>« -nMiisi ^vaV-»>i(ai,

100 THE VEKI..

O«liutw-ak-ow-oyuk, IIo l)0 made for us (1

uihI 2).
Oslictw-ak-ow-i»yak, Ho bo niado for yon.
Oshctow-it-chik, or

(>Mlietow-aknncwit-c1iik, IIo bo niado for tbom.
I*i>S8. Osbotow-ilicbc, or

Osbctow-aknncwilichcy Ho bemodofor bis tbom.

SSoiiio verbs in inVi of tbis conjugation undergo
no contraction, bntcbango tbc » into o in tbo invorso
inflcctionH, making oh and 09h inntoad of ik and i$k ;
OS, No natnb-ok, be conies ti> nio by water*

Otamowari, bo beats bim*

IxnicATivK Mood.
Present Tatse, Direct.

Singular.

Not otiunow-ow, I boat bim, oto.

Kct otaniow-ow.

C)taniow-a\o.

Net otamow-auan.

Kct otamow-anauow* •

Kct otamow-owow.

Ot4imow-awuk.

Plural.

Net otamow-ow-uk, I bciit tbom, etc*

Kct otaniow-ow-uk.

Otamow-&d.

Xct otamow-ai\au-\)k.
Kct otamow-auovr-\x\w.
Ket otamowM>wo^-t>k.
Otamow-ftwiik.

THE VECB. 161

11

I

Invene, Singular* j

Net otamow-ok. Ho beats me* etc. ;

Ect otamow-ok. i

Otamow-uko. |

Not otaraow-ok-onaii. Ho beats vs.

Kct otamow-ok-onow.

Kot otamow-ok-owow. •

OtATuow-oko-wnk.

riural. :

Not otumow-ok-Avuk, Tlioy boat mCf etc.

Kct otamow-ok-wuk.

Otamow-oko.

Net otamow-ok-onau-uk.

Kct otamowH»k-onow-uk.

Kct otaiiiow-ok-owow-uk.

Otamow-oko- wuk.

SuiuuxcTivE Mood.

Present Tense. Direct.

Singular.

Otamow-uk, (Tliat) I boat him, etc

Otamow-ut.

Otamow-ut.

Otamow-uk-it.

Otamow-uk.

Oramow-uk.

tamow-at-chik.

Plural.

Otamow-uk-ik, I beat thom» etc.

Otamow-ut-cbik.

Otaniow-at.
Otamow-uk-ii<ihilt«
Otamow-nk-ik. ^

O tamow-uk- wnlc.
Otaiiif>TC--nt-ohik.

liteenr, SiugnUr.
Otawow-ot, (That) ho boat mo.

Otamuw-oBk, Ho beat tboe.

Otamow-okiit, lie bo boatOD by bim.

. Olmnow-cyiiinit.

Otnmow-otuk.
Otamow-ot»ik.
Otainow-okot-cliik.

Plnnd.
Otaiuow-ot-cliik, (That) thov boat mc, cto.
0(!im..w-i.sk-ik.
Otiiuow-okot.
O lamow-c J' It 11 1 It-c] lik.
Otaiiiiin--Dtiik-wnk.
Otaiiiow-otak-wiik.
tXaitrnw-okot-chik.

IXDHTUtMlXATi: OlUECT.

An. Otamow-owmi, ITo alrikos.

Inan. Oianiuw-ukAti.

IxDicATiVB Moon.
Pa«titv.
ijiuguhtr.
An. Otfiniow-oiv, or

Otumow-nkniiowow, IIo it RtniKlL.
Bel. Ofiiinovv-iliwft, or

0(nnio w-H kunowiliw*.
^«a. Olamow4kiit.W.
■*» Otmiiow-ikatiWtiV.

TUE \'EIID. «,^

PlaniL

An. Otoniow-ow-nk, or

Otamow-akuncwow-nk, They aro stmck.
BoL Otaraow-aliwa, or

Otamow-akimewiliwa.
Inan* Otaiuow-dkatA-wa. ,

Bol. Otamow-okatrdi-wa. ^

SuiiiuNcnvE Mood.
Prrscnt Tente.

Singular.

An. Otamow-ot, or

Otamow-akuncwit, (That) ho bo struck.
Kcl. Otamow-oliche, or

Ot'iniow-akuncwilicho.
Inan. Otainuw-okatAk.
Uol. ( )tamow-ckatulik.

riuml.

An. ()tiimow-<»t-chik, or

Otamow-aknncwit-chik, (That) they ho

struck,
licl. ( )taniow-olichc, or

i )tamow-akuncwiHcho.
Inan. Otamow-ekatriko.
Jkcl. Otamow-ckatuliko.

1 have not yot p^ivon tho Flat- Vowel form of ei titer

«»f tho Transitive Conjugations, but it must bo rcmcm-

)x$red that it is constantly used, and that evory tense

/// tbo ijuhjunctivo mood \& ^wVyjcX. \o xW ^Vvs^w^^e^^

^vhicb oocasioually altera xV^o \iTo\W\^W ^n\v-

-idenhly, although only H^^ &tWt %^\^«^^^^^ ^"^ ^>^^

^yord IB aiTectcd by it.

TIIK VKRB.

Ilc-rc ft»llow tlio Flat- Vowel changes of tLo vorW
3[o\vA«i, lie eatH him; OUimowao, ho boats him;
and Wnpnmri«s he boos him.

Mwiiw-iik.

3I\vaw-«t,

Mwaw-at,

Mwaw-uk-it,

Mwaw-«k,

Mwaw-ak,

Mwaw-iit-ehik,

I ato him.

Thiiu didst eat him.

He ate him.

Wo (1 and 11) ato him.

AVo (1 and 2) ato him.

You atu him.

They ato him.

< >tamow-rus he beats him.
Inverse,

Wi'itjimuw-ot,
Watamownrnk,
Wa tamo w-okot,
Wa ta mo w-i»yu mi t,
Watanu»w-otnk,
Wa til n H »w-< »tak,
AVa tamuw-okot-chi k.

He beat mo.

lie beat thee.

Ilo was bcuiten by him.

He beat us (1 and 3).

Ho beat us (1 and 2).

Ho beat you.

They were beaten by him.

Woiipuiii-ukv

Weapum-ut,

Wciipum-at.

Weiipum-uk-it,

Weiipuiii-uk,

Wciipum-ak,

AVeiipam-at-chi k ,

IFeiipuiii.iik.ik,
irftipuin-utHdiik.

Wapumao, he sees him..

Direct* Singular.

I saw him.

Thou sawest him.

He saw him.

Wo (1 and 3) saw him.

AVo (1 and 2) saw him.

You saw him.

Thej saw him.

TJViOXi »:^«a»^. >3ass«^

THE VEHB.

IGG

Wetlpmn-iik-i t-cbiky
Wciipum-nk-ik,
AW^ipum-ilk-wnk,
Wciipnra-nt-cluk,

Inverse*

Weiipmn-it,

AVciipum-isk,

Wciipum-ikot,

Wciipum-oyiiiui t,

Wcupura-ittnk,

Weiipuin-ittfik,

Wcapuni-ikot-cliik,

ri

WcJipuni-i t-cliik,

AVciipum-isk-ik,

Weiipum-ikot,

Wciipum-cyumlt-cluk,

Weitpum-ittnk-wuk,

Wciipnm-ittuk-wuk,

Woiipum-ikot-cliik,

We (1 Olid 3^ Kaw them.
AVo (1 and 2) saw them*
You Haw tlioin.
Tlioy Kaw them.

Singular.

lie saw me.

I lo Kaw thee.

.1 le was seen by liim.

1 1c saw lis (1 and 3^.

Ho saw us (1 and 2),

I lo saw you.

They were seen by him.

nral.

They saw inc.

'Ilicy saw thee.

lie was seen by them.

They saw us ( 1 and 3\

They saw us (1 and 2).

They saw you.

They were seen by them.

/?.

surrosiTivE, dubitative, ctc.

Wo have now come to forms of the Intransitive
Verb which Avill require much attention and severe
application, as the terminations of most of them are
much more difficult to remember tlian those we have
Iiitherto had to deal with.

This is not much used m ^^'^^^'^S^:!tc.^l^^«
m, stated in the chapV^x on lx.\x««vvv.^^^^^

''^^fid, eiol% or aioka.

\

IXWCATIVH 3IO0D.

i'lV'wnf Tatte. Direct.

Singular.

Nti wuimiii-o\v-atolirt, I ace biia, I suppose, fltc.

This in goncTuUy contracted into
No wit[iiiDi-utokii.
Kc v'ii]iuiii-atokii.
Wiipnunltiikri.
No wapnm-iintin-iilolfri.
Kc wnpum-aiion-Atdkri,
Ko Ynipitiii-fiw^itr'ki'i,
Wapnni-i'i I oka-nn k .

llund.
\c wapnui-uloku-iiuk. I hcq tlicui, I suppose, etc.

Kc WyljlHlu-lltllk.i-Illlk.

Wapuiii-ntokri.
No wiipniii-iiiiitn-titokM-niik.
Kf Wii]>uii)-aiian-utokrt-nnk.
Ko wapiiui-ow-atokil-nnk.
Wapii tnii I (I kil -link.

iHrertr. Singular.
\o wiipum-ik-otiikt'i. He scca inc, I snppOM, etc

Kq M'ii]iiiiii-ik-otukri.

'\V;>i>iii,i.ik-ot.>kr..
Kti wiijiiiiii-ik-oniiu-olokri.
K<' \v;i|<iii>i-ik-unan-4itokrt.
K*.' M;i]>iiiii-ik-ow-atoku.
AVa p M M I- i k-oto k li -nn k .

Xo wApiim-ik-otukiVnQV, Tl^c^ k»wi.*»^**'^SV**-'''

A'o n')ii>um-ik-otokft-&\Ou

iVnpnni-ik-otokft.

TlIE VKHB. in

Xo wapnm-ik-omin-otoka-nnk.
Ke wapum-ik-onan-otoku-nnk«
Ko wapuiu-ik-ow-atokil-nuk.
Wapnm-ik-otokil-nuk.

Past Tense. Direct.

Singular.

No wapum-akopuu, I saw him, I soppoBa, Ota

Ko wapum-akopun.

Wapum-dkopun .

No wapum-anan-akopun,

Ko Avapum-aiian-akopun.

Ko wapum-ow-akopuD.

Wapum-uw-akopun.

Plural.

No wapum-akopun-uk, I saw them, I suppose, eta

Ko wapum-akopuu-uk.

AVapum-akopun.

No wapum-anan-akopun-uk.

Ko wapnm-anan-akopun-uk.

Ko wapum-ow-akopun-uk.

Wapum-u\v-akopuD.

Inverse. Singular.

No wapum-ik-okopun, Ho saw me, I suppose, eta

Ke wapum-ik-okupun.

Wapum-ik-okopun.

No wapum-ik-onan-akopun.

Ko wapum-ik-onan-akopun.

Ko wapum-ik-ow-akopun*

If^/)tun-iJc-ow-akopuu.

A'b nrapam-ik-okopun-uk.
Ke Yrapiiii|.iJc.okopun*uk«

Tr»H TlIB VERB.

Wapum-ik-okopuii-uk.

No wapum-ik-onaii-akopuii-tik.

Ko wupum-ik-onan-akopan-uk.

Ke wapum-ik-ow-akopun-uk.

Wapum-ik-ow-akopun.

All tho otbor tonsos of tho indioativo and potential
moodii are formed from those two, aooording to tho
. roles alroady g^ven.

IttaHimate Fanm.
Indicative Moon.

Pretcni Taue. Direct.

No ivaput-un-atokii, I see it or them, I snppose,etc.

Ke waput-rin-atoku.

Wapu t-um-otoku.

Ne waput-anan-atokal.

Ke waput-anan-atokri.

Ko waput-ilnow-atoka.

Waput-nm-otokiVnuk.

Inverse.

Ko wupum-ik-on-at4>ka. It sees me, I suppose, etc

Ko wapum-ik-on-atokii.

Wapum-ik-otokii.

Ne wapum-ik-ouan-atoku.

Ke wapum-ik-onan-atok&.

Ke wapum-ik-onow-atokA.

Wapnm-ik-otokiVnnk*

Past raise; DiraoL

Ne waput-Tin-akopui^ 1 wcv* \\^\ wk^v*^'^ ^"^^^
^ ^^^put-ilQ-akopim.
Wkput-um-okopun.
J^e waput-Onaa-akopiacii.

THB veuB. 109

Ko waput-unan-akopun.
Ko wtipnt-aoow-akopoiu
Wapiit-amow-akopan. |

Inveno. f

Xe wapum-ik-on-akopun. It saw me, I soppoM, eta |

Ke wapum-ik-on-akopan* j

Wapnm-ik-okopnn. t

Xe wapum-ik-onan-akopan. \

Ko wupTun-ik-onan-akopan. ]
Ke wapum-ik-onow-akopun.
Wapum-ik-ow-akopan. * )

The DuniTATivE.

The Dubitatlvo Auimato is formed from tbe sub-
junctive gcDcially, by the insertion of tho particle
oto after the root of the verb, together with a change ;

in the terminations. I give tho flat-vowel form,
which, in the dubitativo, expresses indefinite time;
:i8. If he love mo. As stated when the Intransitive
Verb was under review, when either of the partides
/.a, Jcc, or ka precedes the verb* the flat>vowel form
is not used.

DuBiTATivE Mood.

Indefinite Time. DireeL

Singular.

Weiipum-ow-uk-a, Ifor whether I see him, eto»

Weiipum-ow-u t-u.

Weiipum-ow-at-H, or

Weapum-ak-wtt.

lKe«pum-ow-uk-it-a.
1 Fottpam-ow-nk-iL
iraapum -ow-ak-wa.
IKespiuD-OMT-at-wavat or

f

\

AVviipuin-ow-uk-wawii, If or whctliorl see tium, otc.

Woiiimni-ow-ii t- wiiwii,

\Voiipma-o w- n t - fi.

"Wcii (111 m-o w-u k-i t-wiiwii.

Wmpiuu ~uw-uk • w)t wu.

.AVouin iiu-o w-uk • wu ivii .

Wcii 1 lum-o w-at- wu wu.

Auolier PUiral.
Wcnpum-ow-uk-anik, Iforwhetlierlieetbotn.otc.
W viipii iii-o w-u t-fini k .
Wcii pum-uk- wiu
Weiipuni-<>w-u k-i t-iin ik.
Weiipii iu-i> w-u k-wui ■ i k.
"AVVipui Oil w- fik - wit n i k .
AVeiipu in-u w- ivak-wu.

Another form of tlut tenw in finqnent OM u tlio
following : —

AV'pupuni-uk-c.

Wctipuin-nt-cho.

AVcJipum-nt-cbe.-

A^Toiiiiuni-uk-ilmlift.

Wof>piiiu-u1c-o.

AVdipuiu-rik-o.

AVcii pii ni -a t- w iiiv ti .

r

Weii pm II -u k- wi I w li .

%V>ii ] >u in - II t- wa wu.

Weiipiiofat-clto.
_U'«i;)ujn.iik.it-WRwa.
Wwi^um-uk-wawa,

Singular.

u-

v";*iiiii-at-\vawiL.

iHvene. Singular.

\VciL]niiii-ik-w.t. If Of wlietbor lie see mc, etc-
"Wft i pmii -isk- w » .

"Wcnpiini-ik-okw». ,

Wofipuiu-oyuinlt-A. i

Woiipum-ithik-wa. i

"\Veupnui-ittak-wfi. , [

Wciipuni-ili-f'Wiikwri. I

llnnl.
Wciipnm-it-wawH, Iforwhcth«rtlM7tMma.otar ' |

Weiipiiiu-ik-wawii. ;

"Weiipuin-isk-wuwA. I

"XVeiipum-ik-okwu. i

"Wciipura-eyiimlt-wowfi, '.'

Weiipniu-ittuk-wuwri. J

Wcupum-ittak-waw.i. ■;

"Weiipum-ik-oiviikwil. «

Ptut Ten$e. Dtnet. I

Singular. i'

Wciipuiii-i.w-Hk-cpwm'i, If or whetber I n« or liftd>

teen liim, eto.
Wciipum-o w-u t-c I >unu .
WeiipH III -ak-opu nu,
AVciipu iii-o w-u k-i t-e puQu .

Weiipum-ow-iik-opunri, !

Weiipum-ow-uk-opunii. ■

'AVciipnm-ow-nk-opunii. i

Fluial. ^

lKeH|)(iJij-o\v-uk-cpuni-»iV. v

H'ftipumKtw-ut-epuiii-i'i^- •.

IToupuiD-ak-ojmnu. >

I roujium-ow-ult-it-cpuni-i*^*-

1 7^ TU£ V£IUI.

Weiipttii) -ow-iik-4j jniQ A-oik.
Weiipn u-ow-fik-opnitA-nik.
Woi'ipii III -ow -nk-opanA.

Invene. SinguUr.
AVoi i]min - i I -<j ] nmri .
'\V(;upn m -iiikiii 111 n ii .
Weiipum-i k-okoputut.
"Wciij mm -ey u m i t-ojiUD A .
Wciipii m-Utiik-cpiin>i.
"Wciipiiiu-ittak-opunu.
AVaipii m- i k-ti w-ok-opii II fi.

Wcaput II- ik ■ wa ))ii II I'l .
WtM'ipii m -iKk -« p un A-ii i k .
Weil 1 II im-ik-okopiiint .
"NVeilpura-cy n 111 I t-cpnn I'l -n ik.
"Woii] HI m-i ttn k-cpiiiiu-nik.
Wcii puni-t t tak -»' I mn '. -n ik .
AVeiipHin -i k -■ »v -Ilk -oj . 11 uu .

FIrat and Smmtl Penotu.

ladffinite Time. Diroct.
Wctipum-cwunil, If or whether thou sou i

^Voiipnm•«}■&k•w-|1. „ „ Uiou M«

Woiipnni-cwrik-wri, „ „ yon see ti

W«jipinii-iltiiii-u, I Me tlieo.

AVeupuiii-ittak-WAWii, I see you.
'Woiipnna-ittnk-wi'i, Wo ko Umwi <k -^wv.

Pa«l T«itae. IftmA-
ireupun-owunmiA, 1\iau ».-«wX'«'»-

)

TIIK VKint. 17^

Inverse.

Woiipuiu-itta-panA, I saw thee.

Weiipam-ittak-wa-punri, I saw you.
Woiipuiii-ittak-opuuri, AVo saw thee or you.

The Dnbitaitvc luauimaie.

This, in its direct form, has the samo terminationii j

as the intninsitivo verb Nipow, ho sloops; but as
Wapatum resembles an intransitive verb, not of tho
Nooond conjugation, which Nipow is, but of tho sixths
I give the tense for Indefinite Time,

Direct. Singular. |

Weiiput-nm-ow-an-a, Tf I see it, etc. '

Wciipnt-nm-ow-un-u.

Weiiput-imi-ak-wa. \

riunil. •

AVciiput-um-ow-ak-wa. ]

Weiiput-um-ow-uk-wil. !

Weiipu t-ii m -o w-ak- wa .
AVeiiput-um-ow-ak-wu.

, Invent, Singular.

Wciipum-ik-ow-an-a, If it see me, etc.

Weiipum-ik-ow-un-a. \

"\Veiipum-ik-ok-wa. i

Plural. j

Weupum-ik-ow-ak-wu. |

Weiipuin-ik-ow-uk-wa. I

Vfeapn m-ik-ow-ak-wa. {

W'ea])Uin-ik-ow-ak-wa. \

Observe that the tcmm^tVo«« J^^:^^::^?^'^
tboBo of the preoeding ^^^V^^^^AT^tA-, ^nxn**^

174 THE VKRB.

2X»embling on intranBitivo vorb of tko fouiili oan-
jQgation.

. F'assivr Voice. Ko wapum-ik-ow-in, I am seen.

DUJUTATIVE.

Indrfinite Timr,

Singular.

Wcapum-ik-^iv-ow-nn-il, If I am seen.

Wciipum-ik-o\v-ow-un-u.
An. Weiipum-ik-wri, or

Wciipum-ak uncwik-wA .
Inan. AVciipu-cliikatuk-wri.

Pom. An, Wciipum-il-ik-wri, or

^Vcjipum-aknnow-il-ik-w^^.
„ Inan. AWiipn-chikat-al-ik-^vA.

IMnral.

Wciij nun-i kn »w-<^w-;i k- wfi.

Wcii J HI m-i k-o w-e w-u k -\v A .

Wciipu in -i k-ow-6 w-A k- wA.
An. Wciipnm-ik-wa-wA, or

Wciipnm-aknucwik-wa-wA.
Inan, Wciipu-cliikatAk-wa-wri.

Po68. An. Weiipum-il-ik-wa-wA, or

Wciipttni-akunc w-i I -ik-wa-wu.
„ Inan. AVeiiiMi-cliikat-Al-ik-wa-wA.

Pasi Ten$e.

Singular.

AVcapnm-ik-ov:-^Nii-«o^«iv-^»
Wtfiipum-ik-o^-vv?-AY^Tw-^

-^* Weiipuin-ik-o\)nti-^ wr

THE VEKD. 176

Po68« An. Woiipnm-il-ik-opun-ii, or

AVciipum-akunow-il-ik-opun-&.
„ Inan. Weiipii-chikat-Til-ik-opnii-Jl.

Plural.

Weiipum-ik-ow-cw-ak-opun-fi.

Wcapum-ik-ow-ew-uk-opun-Tu

Wctipum-ik-ow-ew-ak-opun-a.
An. Wciipum-ik-ow-akopun-a, w

Weiipum-akunewow-akopun-i.
Inan . Weiipn-cb ik-atTiw-akopun-a.

PosB. An. Wciipnni-il-ik-w-apun-u, or

Weiipuni-akunow-il-ik-w-apiin-a.
„ Inan. Weiipu-chikat-al-ik-wak-opun-a.

The Transitive Posse<?sive.

In treating of tho Intransitive Verb, ono Fcction
referred to the Possessive of tlio intransitive; as.
His son, their daughters, etc., in which wo saw that
when a second third person. His him -- that man's
him, that roan*s son, came in a sentence, the verb
assumed a relative form, by tho introduction of tho
rehvtivo particle ilevo or t7/tca, examples of which
have been given in every tense of tho Intransitive
Verb contained in this work. Another section
treated of tho Relative of tho intransitive; as, I
sleep in relation to him, I walk in relation to him,
etc. ; No nipan, I hleep ; Nc nip-ow-an, I sleep in
relation to him. We now go a step farther, and sec
tho ^ame principles carried out with respect to tho
Transitive Verb.

i. TJio PusscjsRivo OV^<iet,lvU lim,K\%\t^^vc8 its
own momr inflection to l\vo nc^xV «v^^x ^«^«s^
or object of it ; oa, Ke BakAi-\m-o^^^^^^^>^^^^«^>

2. The BolaUTO ov ticoeEWT;! ^wv»~

17ri THE vi:i:rH

tniusitivci arc greater than tlioM* of tho intransitive,
iiiasnuicli as a verb in tho n^hitivo case may govern
a noun in tho accnsativt*; as, Malotwat ililew
Bakcli<~u"» unehe ka Hakehalichv JCchchiunctoicn,

Ik Tlio ro8s<*S}<ive Animate, lUrect, is formed by
tho insertion of tho }K)ssc8Kive iMirticlo m after tho
root of the verb, and tho addition uf tlio particlo a
to the tormina tions of the first and second persons.
For some of tho i^ei'sons tho itn may bo omitted,
and tlio relative pailiclo alhea joined to the root,
to form tho wholo person. Tho inverse is formed by
adding olitca to tho invorso verbal inflection.

4. In the Inanimate form, the terminations, both
direct and inverse, are the same as those given witli
the intransitive verb, Nipow.

5. The Singidar and Plunil are alike ; as, No wa-
pumimowa, I see his him or his them.

Transitive Possessive.
Animate.

Indicattve Mood.

Present Tense. Direct.

No wapnm-im-ow-a, or

No wapuni-aliwa, I soo his him or his them»

Ke wapum-im-ow-a, or

Ke wapum-aliwa.

Wapum-im-Ar», or He sees his him, or his^

Waimm-aliwa, or him sees him or his him*

Wapuni-im-illiwa,

No wapum-im-anan-a» We sec his him.

Ko Yvujium-im-anow-a.

A'o WApum-im-owovr-«u

IVapum-im-awuk, ©r
iVapam^li^,^ or

»Vajmm-im-AUwa.

laterte.
Xo wapntii-ik-oliwH, ]Iu liim soea luc, etc

Ke wapum-ikiiliwa,
Wapuin-iknliwa.
Xe wapum-ik-oiutn-ftuu.
Ko TCapiim-ik-oiiaiiow-a.
Ko wApum-ik-owow-owa.
Wapum-ikn iliwa.

Poll Teute. Dind.
\c wapiiui-im-ikt[, or I mw hia liirn or tbom, ot
\e wapiim-alitl.
Ke waiiuiii-tm-at[, or
Ko wapiuii-alitr.
i I wapum-iui-atr, or
Wapum-im-Apini, or
Wapu I II -ill i fcopn 11 .

Xe wapuni-im-nta-n.-ui, or We saw liut him.
\e wapnm-alit'anaii,
]vc ivapum-im-ata-tiow, or
Ko wapum-alit-anow.
Ko ■\vnpii]u-ii(i-iit4i-woiv, or
Ke wapuui-alitHUvow.
O wapum-im-ala-wow, or
O vapum-alit-owow, or
"Wapum-iui-Tipun-iik, or
AVapum-ui c- wa-kopun .

Inverte.
Ne wapnm-ik-ol-iti. Ilia Itim aaw mc, etc

Ke wapum-ik-ol-itr.
O ivapum-ik-ol-itr, or
IVapum-ik-oI-cpun, or
IVapmu-ilc-ol-ik-opun.
^e irajjum-ik-oMt^aTtau .
^c Tvapum-ik-ol-it-«nano* -s

Ki- wnimm-ik-ol-it-owiiw.
O waimni-ik-ol-it-owow, i
Wa [Hiiu-ifc-t >l-ik-npiiu.

IjirtKATlVK Moau.

Siiigiili^r.
AVapiim-iti), Scothon liisUim^rthom.

Akoslke kiiltn 'tra^iii- I^ut Mm boo liis liini.

Wapum-iti)-iitow. i-'^i its svo his him.

Woimm-im-ik, Ijeo j-e his him.

Aktwlie kuttn wapiini- I<ot Uioni bm his binw
ini-riwnk,

Fmure TpHtr.

\Vaj>um-iiu-nkiin, tico thon his Itim.

WApiim-im-sknk, Let oa ftce his hi&i.

W»{tnm-iiu-akHl[, Am yo hi> him.

St'lUQNcnvK Mood.

rraent T«n§e. Ltr4ct.

Siugular.

(That) I aoc his him, etc.

n-iik.

iiii-aliolii*.

"Wiipum-im-Hi-
Wnptitn-iuMit, or
WHiiiim-alichf "r
\V«imm-im-..kl..
WajHiiu-im-uk.
Hajiiitu-iiii-'ik.
tKa/itiui-im-ut-iiliik, or
>l'«ptim-alieko or •im-«\uJ)M.

Intene.

Wainiin-il-I(t>clif . (Th«t) hi* him iaei ia«, (tc

Waiium-il-iHk.

Wapnm-ik-oliclii\

Waimm-il-oy ni 11 1 r.

'Wapum-il-ittuk.

Wapum-il-ittiilt.

AVftpum-ik-ol icbe.

Pa$l Tout. Direct.
Wapum-ini-uk-ci>u«. (That) I aaw hia hlin, «to.

Wapnm- i m-u t-epii n .
Wapum-im-nd-pun, cr
Wiipum-ali-kopuiirioi-im-ali-kopnnfl.
Wapum-i ra-uk i t-e pn ii .
\Vai>um-i m -uk-opnii .
Wnpnm-im-rik-opii ii .
Wapum-iiii-aw-an-puii, w
Wnpum-ali-wa-koiiunri or -im-ali-wft-k<q>uuiL

/jtwrae.
MTupma-iI-it-oputi, (That) hia him aow dm, etc

■\Vapii m - il- isk-epiui ■
Wapiim-ik-ol-iB-pim, or
AVapn m-i I-i k opu D fi .
Wapum-i!-eyiunit-c pu a .
'^Vapu m-i 1- ittuk-ep un .
Wapiun-i 1 - i ttok-epnu.
Wapuni-ik-ol-iwaa-pnn, or
Wapum-il-i wa-kopu d a .

Ikanikatb.
isdicaitti uood.
PreMKl Tme. DwwA.
A'e waput-nm-wan, 1 1«» »i»«,

■fie wafut-om-wan.

Waput-iiin-wriii, Of

Wuimt-ii m- il i wft.

No wapiit-nm-wim.

Ke wa]mt-ani-i

Ka wn 11)1 t-ura-wnn-c wow.

WapHt-um-wu-wuk, or

AVii pu t-u ni- i I i wa.

iHverte.

Nfe wai-uni-ik-ownu. Hit it WW me, etc

Ko wapum-ik-ownn.

TVaimni-ik-owfu., or

Wapi im- i k -ol i wa.

N© wapum-ifc-owan-nn.

Kc wapum-ik-owiiimnow,

Ko wiipnni-ik-owan-uwow,

Wjipmn-ik-owiVwuk, or

"VViipuni- i k-ol nva.

Pott Team. Direct

N« waput-um-wa-ti, I saw hia it, «tc

Ko waptit-um-wa-U.

O waput-um-wtt-ti, or

Waput-um-U-cpun or -il-ikopan.

Ko waput-nm-wa-ta-nan.

Ko wapiit-nju-wa-ta-nanow.

K« waput-um-wa-ta-wow.

O wapHt-ura-wa-ta-wow, or

IVaput-um-il-cjmii-uk or -il-iwa^kopim.
Immne.

Ko wapiim-ik-owa-tl. Hit it nw mo, etc

Ko wupum-ik-owa-tl.

O wapun)-ik-«wa-tl, or

iru/inm-jlt-ol.iltoimn.
A'o wajium-ik-ow-it-MittTi.
■"o wapam-ik-ow-it-ftoMWiW.

THE VERB. 181'

Ko wupum-ik-ow-it-owow.
O wapum-ik-ow-it-owowy or
'Wapum-ik-ol-iwakopun.

lMPf:R.iTi\ic Mood,

Prf$eiU Tente.

WaputuDi-owy Soo thou Ids it.

Akoiiho kutta waputam« Let him see kit it.

WttO,

Waputmii-wa-tow, Let lu see His it.

TVaputum-wak, See yo lus it.

Akoshe kutta waputum- Let them see his it
wu-wuk,

Fniare Teiue.

Waputnm-ow-akun, See thou his it.

Waputum-ow-akak, Let us see his it.

AVapntuiu-ow-akak, See ye his it.

SuafONcrivE Mood.

Prc9ent Tense. Direetm

Waput-um-wuk, (That) I see his it, etc

Waput-um-wut.

Waput-um-wat, or

Waput-um-iliche.

Waput-um-wuk-lt.

Waput-um-wak.

Waput-um-wat-chik, or

Waput-um-iliche.

Invene.

IFi/)iui2-ikH)w.uk, Ti^ \V. ««^ lasK ^Xsu

TrAponi-ik-ow-ut.
TKspam-ik-ow-at, or
TFAptun-ik-oliwa.

182 THE VERB*

Wapiim-ik-ow-\ilci t.
Wapum-ik-ow-uk.
AVapum-ik-ow-ak.
Wapura-ik-ow-at-clnk, or
lYapum-ik-oliche.

PnU Taue. Direct.

Waput-uin-wuk-cpun.
Waput-uiu-wut-epun.
Waput-um-wat-cpaxiy or
Waimt-uni-il-it-opun or •il-ikopun-u.
Wapui-um-wuk-it-epun.
AVaput-um-wnk-cpun,
AVaput-um-wuk-opim.
Waput-um-ilit-wa-pun or -il-iko-wa-kopnuu.

Tho Dnbitative is formed from those tenses in the
same manner as in the principal verb* WapumAii,
ho 80C8 him.

The Transitive Simul-vtive,

Tlie terminations of this verb are tlio same as
those of the intransitive simulative ; it is, indeed,
conjugated throughout in its direct form as an *
intransitive verb.

Xe wapum-ow, I sec him.

Xe wapum-a-kason, I pretend to see him.

Waputum, He sees it.

Ne waputnm-o-kiUon, I pretend to see it.

This lias no inverw^ ioTXC^ voi^. ^^ ^^ssSUsriw ^
nanedied by the nae of t\k^ ^«t>tt ifc«wJi»>^ T*^^?^^^

preUmdg to see me.

THE TKRB. IKS

IxDiCATiVE Mood. i

Present Tense. Direct* * i

Singular.

riuml.

No wapum-a-kosoii-an.
Ko wapum-a-kason-aiiow.
Ko wapum-a-kason-owow.
Wapum-a-kaso-wuk.

Xe wapum-a-kaKon, I protend to &ce kiuu

Ke wapum-tt-kasoDy Tliou pretendcst to mo \

him. ]

Wapum-a-kaso.

T

I
P
I
I

J

Inverse. Sin«^lar.

X6 wapum-ik itwaso, IIo pretends to aoe me.

^ Ko wapum-ik itwaso.
Wapum-iko-twaHO. f

Plural.

« •

No wapum-ik-onan itwaso.

Ko wapuiu-ik-onow itwaso.

Ko wapum-ik-owow itwaso.

Wapum-ik-owuk itwaso. \

■
Kei»ui'1.icatiox.

Mauy transitive verbs tuko tho lioduiiHcation, I
which gonorally greatly inteuiiiiica tho aoti<m; ok,
OtiDilii, ho takes lum, Otv-^X-iiuM, V<& wscum bini; >
Xutomilii, bo callB hm, ■Su-T»^-\«ttS&, \» «JS^j«. \
him, as on God ; Xutuw»i>tt»Wi,^ ^ ^ '^'«*^ \
A«-iiu-tuwapuin.V.. be gow V> ««V^t«v. N^

IM THE VLIIU.

Manner and Place,

The particle ttthr. or U (or i before verbs beginning
with t ) is useil t<i tlenote manner and place ; an,

\e totuwow, I do it to him.

\et itotnwow, I ko do it to him.

Ohifihiiwiitao, lie commands him.

rtushowataii, lie so commands him.

Kitotnhri«>, ' He takes him off.

Itutubao, lie takes him there.

KichetinhuwrHi. He Mcnds him off.

Ishitihhiiwri<i, Ho sends him there.

There are no tnmHitive Diminutives, but some
verbK SIR* made to take the diminutive form in
h[>eaking to a cliihl, or when ono is aske<l for a small
favour ; jin, Ko nutawalemittin kitche sakeh-tf^yun,
I wiNh you to h»vo mo a little; Ko nutotumattiii
kitche niinah-iVA-eyun, I beseech you to give mo h
liilh *lrhil\ meaning a small quantity of tea, otc.

Kxamplcg of the TrauBUuv Verb,
Indicative Motn».
Dtrert ami Inverse.

Me HaHuiatravitmoirHli nrt I seek my childivn.

owashimishuk.

Xc ka nepiilemotoliucotn 1 will trust in God as long

KIcliemuneto ishpi^U as I live.

ku pimatiiH*yau,

JiTe la waMw/«tfdl€iail«Hl\ TW^- >JmKw li^^*^ ^"^"^^

mimawelu iniiku ma ka X\i^l i^wSVvNN.'tos^

fl^*

TUE

185

Ke he leofmnnkow na notawo ?

Pitoma pcko fie wapuuuUl
wuskudi, UBOohokama-
ka nomawola na oicke

3IecMtwow ke pdiuwajmn
paumoeho tapwdtuwai^

Ke ni$etotakwuk na ilile-
wuk a ayiunohatchik?

All; luitonc ne ntteiotak'

Kwliu)k na ke iipuliuma'
koicoicuhWCixniBiikoBliC'

_ "WTik fi aputiseyak ?

Alt ; kwlusic nc tivuhima^
konanuk a aputiscyuk,

Hast thoQBoon my&thor?
For a very short timo

only I saw him long

sinooy but lately I haYo

not seon him.
Ho Had heard him fire-

qnontly before he paid

attentum to him.
Do tho Indians mider-

stand yon when yon

speak to them?
Yes ; they understand me

thoroup^hly.
Do tho Englishmen pay

you fainy for your

work?
Tcs; they pay ns fairly

for our work.

In both these scntcnoes tho intransitive Terb
might have been put in the relative case, to express
working relatively to them — d aputteewdk and d opaifr-
eewukU,

Kuyapuch na ke ka voeche-
iuehekamik ketanis il
onapumit?

Puyukwow a pipoonilik
ne ka ioecheiuMekdmik^
uko maka pakan ku
tushekut,

Kcpatomn na, nekosis ?

i/i, nuka, he jxltaHtu ;
wopaoh maka ko ka
jitilcno naiiUin^

Will your daughter still
live with you (now)
she is married ?

She will live with me for
one winter, and will
then dwell apart.

Dost thou hear me, my

186

THE VSRB*

Hiscwu atiiscyuk iiaspicb

ke iokchitUnoicow, ka

milwasliik maka ke ka

kisklnohunuittlnowow,
Ke ka peshichehinowato na Will you all pay attcu-

All of you I greatly love,
and what is good I will
teach you.

_ xnisewu iltuscyak ?

tion to me?

A& ; naspich ke ka paHU' Yes ; wo will pay great

diehitUnan^ numawes- attention to you, and

kat nashta ke ka antciit- will never disobey you.
oiiiuaHj

Patcnia machich keshi- 6y-and-by, at the last

kaka ke ka otigJikotceka-
p<nc€$ioicmo Jesus TiV
paskonekat,
Jesus ke Eicheokemame- Jesus, our Lord, died for

day, you will stand
beforo Jesus the Judge.

now kc ke ne2Hf8iumak<h

us.

Impeiiative Mood.
WoitamnnowtttaH^ O TapV Enlighten us, O Lord.

lechikilyun,
Keshnvoatototeiny ne Te-
pTdechikuni,

Show kindness to me, O
my Lord.

Net owa8himi8hetv)k, pe- lly children, pay atten-

ghu'heJttkok ke kiskiuo- tion to your teachers,
humakamewowuk,

Kitemakalimikah ka kite- Ilave pity (pi.) on the

makesichik,
Paiki* una shcshep ka
pimelat.

lx)or.
Shoot that duck which
is flying.

KeehkutukokokliA midii]d' Cut down (pL) the large
tichik mistikwuk peko, trees only*

IVcakat kitcmakwi^TXTi^. SkkwJia. i^ ^^^ ^v
muluwapumdhLn Okie- iMto«^ ^^ -w^ -sk^
mow ; wela miikki^lLc'ka
weohehik.

OpMi--« nud PcUnli'tl.
Ke ia ie« IcitkiaoJuiMUiro- Toa ^vill msh to toncli

teowiik kpohc ililcmowo-
wowuk Tiko A kiski'ik'tu-
luuk miiEinahtkun,

Ki" Im ti-ocke ntithiicali Hiin
k.i wunisbik £ka kitcho
iii she wu natiso t,

KUtcnacli nianshcsli i

follow Indiaas

now that you know

the book.
Ynu eliould trj' to find

tlio lost one. Unit liu

Aiii not.
JtloEt {itx>bali1y I ehall bo

f)c wtehekownk ililuwitk, nblo to Lolp Uie ludiuis
n little.

.Moshuk Jee ka atjxiUmolo- Thou ehonldst always

liiioan Kichcmunoto. imt thy trust iu (ioi.

KIchcinunctonamawi.'ekat IJoil would uorcr Itxra

id ia nuttttikotr, tUet'

NiimawcskatitcitaKinjNtii- IIu woold never oaat M

kolautMc, off.

SuiuuscrivB Moon.

4

Wceh'twut-'i nokosia ke ku
kunawulcmik,

Niilidihiaiatn Peter, we-
tumakun^vcpuch kitsho
tukoslilk. It niUuieaiowuk
IStche aischaioil lacnaki-
totAyanu.

NaktaBukieaiea ot« no ka
j)ucbctiahu wo^vuk,

O/Mivtcriajwuicttu mi I: in i
TMpaskoDekut ko ka\.-e-
£miiowow miBcwi u Vo
toeonijik isbpuh ka te
ifimatiseyOk,

If tlmu goest off with my
son. hu will tako caru
of thee.

8houIdat tliou moot Pct«r,
t<.'ll bim tu come soon,
as I wish bim to ac-
cxHnpany mo when I
go off again.

Should I meet them (by
%1'atcr) I will lond
them bcre.

When you stand bi'fore
Wu ii^l'i> ■S^'*!. will
ica^Kft ea. "CmA -jura.

^

188

THE VERO.

Keshpin kUeMahllemuttea-
ir<f ka kiteiiiakcsickik,
KicliemuQcto ko ka ki-
temakalemik kitemakc-
seyuna,

Eoslipin ililowuk utooBka-
Mtuwaitcatea Kicbomauc-
towa kutta milototako-
wuk.

Keahpiu l'€ wechlwuiepHHu
notawi*, niimawola ko
ka ko ku%rukntatl.

PoikUicnta maliekuu ka
ke nii)ahat manishoha-
nislia, mistaho ko ka
tipuhumattin,

Timw'Uuwaia okawoja no
ka milwiiliinow ; anwd-
tuwaia maka no ka mu-
chulimow,

Naspich ko milwdlomittiu
dKiskiilemiitan a tnt^o/o-
tuwutchih kcBheniuk,

Ke sakohin <2 ki$k(iliMejfHH
naspioh <1 takehittan^

Ke milwilIetnmoLik <f pe-
MeiekiU

If thou hast pity on the
lKX)r, God will havi?
pity on tkco when thou
art in clistress.

If Indians serve God, IIi*
Avill do them good (i.<r.
thvy will be done good
to by Ilim).

If thou hadfit accompi-
iiied my fatlicr, thou
vrouldst not have got
into a starving oon-
ditiou.

If thou shootost tho wolf
which killed the sheep,
I will pay thee largely.

If he obeys his mother,
I bhall think well of
him; if he disoboys
her, I shall think evil
of him.

I think very well of thee,
as I know thee that
thou doest well to thv
younger brothers (or
sisters).

Thou lovost me, as thou
knowest me that I
greatly love thee.

TIIK VEUD.

189

•

The Suhjanciiee a$ AffirvMtiee.

Wei >uch no ka tukoehinin,
HKO maka kd kiMktuohH"
muwukik^liot owashim-
ishuk,

Wcpuch kutta pa^iolownk
ncskuk, uko maka ku
kochc paskistciUehilCf

Akoelio kutta kunawale-
tum ka xnilwashinilik,
ako maka hi nuhtluwd'
JicU Eichomunotowa,

Ko keBbetayuuu ka noche-
tayan ke ka pucho iia-
tittinowow, alko maka
Id loetunidUaktcuk misc-
wa ka ko ekik,

Kct italoiuittin wapiikfi
kitcho jmche nashctfun,
Tiko maka kd hiskdlctU'
mehei/un ka itwalmakuk
kicho mnsinahikun*

Josus Christ ota uskok ko
tukoshin kttehc pinicichc'
hat omucbetwowa,

Omuchetwowuk uka ii
kwaskatUichik it&lita-
kosewuk kitche nundka-
cJiehikotchik Eiohomuno-
towa^
ICicbemunfto kutta xneliUV

Piuiillce Aohakwa mine-

iri ufiehe ka MuMiimar

I sball come soon, and I
will then toach thy
children.

The gcoflo will aoon
come (flying), and then
thou wilt tiy to ahoot
them.

Let him take care of
(attend to) what is
good, and he will then

1»leaso God.
ten I have finished
what I am now about,
I will como to you,
and will then tell you
all that has happened.

I intend thee to come to
mo to-morrow, and I
will then cause thee to .
know what the great
book rthe Bible) says.

Jesus Cnrist came into
the world to save
sinners.

Sinners, when they do
not repent, are uaUe
to receive punishment
from Grod.

Go3l ^*^ ^'^^ ^iiM^^<^
aak.

lao

TirE VERB.

Jesus kutta itotuhaii
kfcliekesbikok ukota
Jntche wechctmhchmihot
kakokii xnisewri uiiohe
ka tapwayaltmtkal^

Uneko mitone ka vnpale-
wciotiiwachUc Kichemn-
netowa numawela ituli-
tako60\vtik kitehe ghako'
ekehfkotchik Muchemu-
notowa,

Tu[mlcchikajan, ka vuto-
tuicutchik unoko ka atfH-
mehagtaukik^

Jesus will take with him
to heaven, there to
abide with him for
ever, all those who
believe in him.

Those who put entire
trust in God are not
liable to be overcome
by the devil.

Lord, who listenest to
those who pray to
th(x».

DcwTATiVE Mood.

Owuna irapwdyilUMikml

kutta pimachehakune-

wcw,
Tapwaltuwdii na ayunie-

huwckomowa keslieni ?
Tanema piko, numawela

ne kisKalletun teOjuvti-

tuwahea,
Numawela ne kiskaletun

ieakehrwNna^
Ke ka kiskinohumuwow

misewu tuto owuna ka

wapumawuith
OwiLna kA ocMmowHkml^

alwukwana,

jEfehemnneto numa^eft-

kMt kutta iirapi]i&& ow^-

liwa kil puoho matikofc

Whosoever ' believeth on
me shall be saved.

Does your younj^r bro-
ther obey the Minister ?

I don't know whether he
obeys him or not.

I don't know whether
thou lovcst me or not.

Thou shalt teach every
one whom thou mayest
see.

** Whomsoever I ah<dL

THE vznn.

Kcsliiiin Meah-heK'ilwi
knnawiilotumok no ku
kilskvrSwiDa,

" If yb love me IsBp ^
commaudments."

Exam}ilet of iJit Inatumale Vri'b. .
IsrucATivB Mood.

Direct and
Ko tapwiiiriti na miBowa

ka itiviimakuk ko uiii-
_ Binahikun ?
.^it ; ntisewu nc tapir<il<i»

ata maiiulieah n muikn-

man u aliniuk kitcho

nitvluchckatTik,
Ke uiilia'iletuniehiloiioieou)

na u avuuietayuk im-

piclio MiKchittak Jccus?
Tapwu naapich nc vittieii-

UtumehikoHaH,
Klcbeinuiieto piitum mi-

HCWi'i ka ayutnenanew-

unilik,
Ke tullotiilako na kokoein

n'tukolunelow ka ko
_ ituliuhamnwuk ?
Au, naspicli kc milototaho,

onoca maka kakat milu-

ayOTT,

Dost tliou bcliovfl all t]

book sa^B ? I

Yea ; I boliovo it all, i
though I find a litj
hard to ho imderstod

Docs it make yon bap^
when you read b^
much Jesus loreaTOi

Verily it luakn* lu rd
happy. ]

God hcarii all tliat
xpoken. I

Did the medicine wh^
I seiit yoar aon )
him any good?

Yes, it did Mm
good, and ho ia i
nearly well.

SCWDSCIWB. TiVwivi. ,

Xe moieuehetamna misow* Wbft^vVWWff^

km te pukitiko. mcna fV^^^^^SS

ice ].* Jiche ietokau ^^^^^

192

THE TERR.

Wdpviidcicaica o miiclieto-
tumowinewowa, totuh-
icaica inaka ka mihva-
sliinilik, tapieaiuhcaira
nuslita miloacbomowiu-
ilow, kiitta sbaw&lemi-
kowuk Kfcbemunetowa,

Keshpin ke totumowdco-
puna ka itwAmakunilik
olushowriwinilew, nn-
inawcla luita he otUH'o-
puHuk ka ispiche mala-
tunilikc,

Nospiniita kwrnskitatise-
win ilko maka kd m{$'
kumun kajamalitomowin,

Ke kiBkulotan na apeehisk'
alroyttninuche mi tube (or

_ a muchetdtUkakoiftm) ?

All; mecbutwow no mis-
k&n d mithumdletumeki-
kayati^ a voe i$hewelikifffaH
il isbe malatuk,

Ke toeiukaleiumchikod na
ka ko piinosonatnboBk,
il pistabosk una miiobet-
wat owasbisb ?

If tbev forsake tbeir sins,
and do wbat is rigbt,
and believe tbe Gos-
])ol, tbey sball rooeivo
mercy fn)m God.

If tbey bad done wbat
tbe law commands, '
tbey would not bave
been overtaken by sncb
evil tbings.

Follow after rigbteous-

ness, and tben tbou

sbalt Und peace.
Do you know tbat an

ovil beart dwells witb-

in you ?
Yes; I often find tbat

it troubles my mind.

wisbin^ to lead me

into evil. .
Did it cause you mudi

suffering wbon tbat

misobiovous boy struck

you by tbrowing a

stone at you ?
Tes ; it put me to mudi

pain. Look wbere be

All; naspicb ne

tumehucoO. Kunuwapu-

ta ka ke pistahot, k&ya-

puch Dokwun, v- ^ -«>

AEkutuwaletumoV, 5ko ^ w^ ^*^^^**s«
wopnch led fciakaktum^

Mi>

\V «^^ J^"*^-« 'S'

TUK VfJlU.

193

Examples with Ae Flat Vawd.

Ko kc miskiin na ne mcK Ilavo yon found my

knifo that jroQ lout ?

koman ka ko wnnota-

All ; kinwush ne ke nann-
tuwaputiin, kfika maka,
katutuwal ne ko kwAs-
kokapowin, uko teeiipn-
tuman^

Ke patumwnk miloache-
mowinilcw, alko maka
LtDcaakatisiich < A',

Kin wash nc ko kunuwa-
putun, fi kucbo iiiseto-
tunian, kukat maka no
ko poncn ; uko kaka ka'i-
ka watitihoyan ka itwa-
makiik,rikonaspicli mdl-
waletuman.

Yen; I looked for it for
a long time; at last
I turned suddenly
round, and then saw
it.

Thoy heard the Gospel,
and thou repented,
(changed their mode
of life).

I looked at it for a long
time, endeavouring tt»
understand it, and Uien
nearly gave it up ; then
its meaning gradually
came to mc, and I was
very glad.

DuBriATivE Mood.

Apitisewiik na ililcwuk?
Tancma piko; numawcia

no kiskulotun capittsc-

wakiodf
Tane ka itwut okomow

waputuka ka ko to-

cholcatalik?
Xumawela no kiskulotun

kd ttwdkiod ; kiatenach

maka numawela kutt&
sApuletum,
Keetha na katta oshetovr
notawekichekunilew a-
oocb u sekwuDilik ?

Aro the Indians at work ?
I don*t know whether

they aro at work or'

not.
"What will tho master

say when ho sees what

has been done ?
I don't know what he

will say ; but most pro-

\)aXA.^ \k!b V^ \m^ 4ift«

11)4

THE VE&B.

Xumawola no otche wetn-
luak kd oshetaktca^

No ka milwuletTin kitche
kiskalctuinan kd oiinu-
mowdhcd no uiusinahi-
kuna^

He has not told me
whether ho will make
one or not.

I shall bo glad to know
whether you will re-
ceive my books or not.

Examples of ike Accidental PomIvc.

Yakwa,yakwa, n'tanis ; Ice
ka Ukicason^

Ko ko wapinaowuk mo-
chut kipuwaknnuk A
mamachekirapisochikj tl
ucpowitchik naspich i1
pcki.skasenakositchik.

No manuinkatun u wapu-
tuman koona ashi mf-
tone a tiktftot^

No ko wa]>ntun mekewam
a chimuldk nochimik,

Ke pcuoticatcd ncskuk no
ka i>ctuwowuk nowu-
tik.

No moshctan h Koketan-
yan tl wa]>umuk malot-
wat Paul d mauuLcluskica-
pi$oi tl otishkowckapo-
westuwat muchetwa-
liche otipulcchikuwa,

Wa milonakosit \m«b ^
woshish Ira makopUoil
A«2ir na jxuldwa xi« NVf^ar
chekana?

Take care, take care, my
daughter ; you will bo
burnt,

I saw many fettered
prisoners, standing
with very sorrowful
countenances.

I am surjmsed at seeing
that the snow has al-
ready entirely melted.

I saw a tent standing in
the woods.

"When the geese are dried
I will put them inti»
my bag.

I feel bold when I see
righteous Paul, mana-
cled, standing before
the wicked govemor;

TBI VERB.

195

Xnmawola ushkwa; poB-
takwawa maka ko ka
p&twattin^

Naspich ne wesukisin ota
nesitik ka ke MZnoofoyoN,

Not yet; when thoy aie

dry, I will bring tliem

to you.
I am smarting greatly

here in my foot wheie

I was burnt.

Example$ of Ot^iaral Famine.
Nekosis, ke nuionukawiu^ My son, thou art called.

Ililetok, ke ka wapunuk'

owinawow iiiucbo totum-

Tikwii,
^esbpin pukwashewily-

alkwai, numawcla ke ka

italctriiiowow kttclie «a-

kehikoweyak^
Owashishotok, kosbpin

kctimeyt'ikwa Ice ka ota-

mahokowinowoWj
Mecbatwow ke tcetuniak-

owinowow kitcbe-miisi-

nabikunik kitcbo sake-

bittoyuk.
Tan utcyuk, aka a totu-

muk ka ituBhowatikaiDe-

yak i

Mccbat nutomowuk (or nu-
lomakunewewuk)^ maka
cbukuwasbisb uHiwdla-
pununottk (or toawdlapu-
makunewewuk)^
Uneke ka trdjidletamotoa-
iunemiehik o much^
^waurinewowa kakekSb
hUia jpimOiCkehakMttn'

Indians, you will be seen
if you do what is eriL

If you bato, von must not
expect to be loved.

Children, if you are idle,
you will be beaten.

We are often told in the
Bible to love one an-
other.

What is the matter with
you, that you do not
do what is commanded
you?

*'Many are called, but
few are chosen."

TbosA whose sins are for-

\

lor.

TUE V£i:u.

Mobhnk kr ttipiraiikoinn"

otrotr kitcho obliitumuk

akoluwa'iHOwin ka pa-

pulik,
Ke tfal'trnMrMiL'oirinanow

ilka piko kitcho pitu-

iiiiik, umka kitche to-

tuiinik ii88iclio ka mil-

waKliik keslipiii nutu-

wAlcttitiiuk I'ttche iiiiVo-

ttra tn'i Irm iloirryn l\
Ispo tcachtjtetaLnHctcUrhik

clicmanik «:tche, kalkat

tapwal ko \\one pimati-

bcpumik,
Kc irapHMaLuiteirctcnl' a

iikwimnhokotcliik kuK-
_ kuna,
A islio pimatiso^'ak ako

ka islio tipashmil-otce'

TllK lik>*LIXTIVE FOUM.

Kituuicapiimlitifiokt not o-

washiiuishctok, Ako kal

miskuniak H pochislika-

koyi'ik nicchut mucbo-

twawiiia.
IJwaftita'i itahchliiif*oinik As-

picho ttakehatchik one-

kehikowowa,

Always you arc cried to
(adiuuuishcd) t«i ileo
from tho wrath to
come.

Wo aro wamccl not t»nly
to hear, but likewific*
to do what is good, if
Ave desire to be con-
sidered good.

"When they were drawn
from tho bout, truly
they had nearly ceased
to live.

They were seen covered
with tho waves.

As you live so you will
bo judged.

Look to yourselves, mr
childron, and you will
find that you have
within you many sins.

They love themselves
more than they love
their parents.
Mochut shooleyannk nc kc 'tELnrj %qSX\xi'^ ^ ^^^"^^^^

pntiseyan, 1^5 Nioi^* ^^^^jj^ ^^s

-MiliotwttcLik ImmieAle* IVife «^ ^^'^<^DSl^. "^^

THE VKRH.

197

sliakochohikotoliik ki-

Mewofiowinilow,
lliletok, ke tnilototastiono'

looto ; milototakok nush-

ta misewa kotukeyuk
_ ililewiik,
A kisUdemittiwuafir.wuk

nnmawcla milwashin,

A mamitoiuilemiittsonan'
ncuk naspich milwAle-
takwiin,

bo not oYeicomo bj
anger.

Indiana, you do good tci
yourselves ; do good
likewise to all other
Indians.

For one to honour him-
self (self-honour) is not
good.

Self-examination is very
good.

The Kkciprocal Form.

•tv

rantil ka ko ishc nuktHh-

kattoydk ?
N'timik walow nc ke nu-

kishkattonan, fiko niaka

ka pacho tcccMwittoi/ak^
llilewuk moshiik kuita

iccchchittopun n k.

Where did you moot each

other ?
We mot each other far np

the river, and then we

came on together.
Indians should always

assist each other.

(Tnoko ka imkioaiittacJuk Those who hate each

numawela kiitta ge sa- other cannot love God.

kehawuk Kichemiiue-

towa,
Ke wapumao a %iotiiiittO'

lichcj
Kisktiiohnmattotfakwd we-

puch ke ka kiskalctnn-

owow ke musinahikun-

He saw tliem fighting

together.
If you teach* each other

you vnll soon know

yoni books.

Xumawela, ne kiskaletau 1 ^vm'^» ^^^^^^ ^^W^^x
scdieAiUoiicawH, <^2 ^""^^ "

108

THL VERB.

tapwAwiu he nnltMai-
(omal'unira ; kwfuskitn-
tiscwiu nashtakayum)'!-
Ictumowin le ochiiuiif'
toMakHnira^

met t(>gother ; riglit-
eonsncfls and peace
have kissed each other ^^
(raalm Ixxxv. 10.)

Kxam}iIvM of the Tran$itire pMsesstvc.

AV unhrhiMotra nekosiH ot

owasliimiRlia,
Kc h'lininn'iUmiMOtra kati-

iiiukiMt iliit'W ntnnisa.
Tut wow a keshikak net

(ttftniiriotcau Kiclicmn-

iiotd ot ayumewin,
Xas]»ich fir miloiotal'oiran

Kicheniuiictoo 1)11181 ua-

hikun ii aifHmrUncuL\
NeKhcm ok<K«isa iiaspich

ne itaMil'oiiva,
Mosliuk kr notiiiikotran'

CMoir Miichcmnnoto o

knknyalvsewin,
Kicliemuncto o Piihlkc

Achakwa Zv* ttaM^U'

maL'oitotea^
Netani kuiiairalcMik'oliira

iictaiiis ok«)8iiia,
Mary Lr oitulmiio .lanea ot

owashiinishili wii ,

I love my son's cbildron.

I take care of the poor

man's daughter.
Ever}' (lay I read God'n

Word.

God*s book does mo much
good when I read it.

My younger bn>thcr's sini
loves me greatly.

The craft of the devil
always assails us.

God's Holy Spirit en-
lightens us.

My dog is taken care of
by my daughter's son.

'yiaryr has taken Jano'n
chikl.

'iliis may l)o ot\\cxit\Hi^ ^x\ftsi«i^\ ^^^a^

-Vary ko otimmao iaw ot ^^^^^^'^^^^^^^^
JIary ko otmiio 3tSioa o\i wtoACYBJ^J^t^
^lary kc otiuiAiwa 3%xiWk o\. o^ viss^

THE VERn.

109

As long as the possessive or roLitivo form is
^ven in one part ot a Rentenco, or clause of a sen-
tence, it is sufficient. The variety of forms I heard,
for a long time greatly confused me ; I thought one
must be right and the others wrong ; but in answer
to my frequent inquiries, I was told, Akwane tapis-
koch, they are just alike ; or, IMyukwun ka itwama-
kuke, they mean the same thing.

Net okemam okosisa nas-
pich nuttwalcmimaliwa
kct okomama otanisi-
liwa,

My master's son greatly
desires thy master s
daughter. •

In this sentence the only change ))08sible is the
omission of the particle m in the verb nutuwalem-
m-filewa; for in the simpler sentence, My master's
son (his him) desires her, it is absolutely necessary
that the verb be put in the relative caso^a matter
extensively illustrated in the course of this work.

Numawela nc Jca nutotH-
ioaliica okosisa puche
ayumchtUtd,

Ne ka toechehmotea ototTi-
ma wapumimukut

Kc ka aakehimaCi misewa
Klchemuneto ot owash-
imisha,

Ne kapdche natikoUica mi-
sewa ot owashimisha
naspich d Bokehimiiclie^

I will pay no attention
to his son, should ho
come to speak to me.

I will help bis friend
when I sec him.

Thou shouldst love all
God's children.

All his children will come
to me, as they all lovo
me greatly.

Jjfueheiouao oshoma o paa- Ba 'oaea his younger bro-
iriselcanilew a mtslnrai- \i«rf% ^^iwv^vAVfe^aaSk*

200

nii: VLRB.

ka kikUhkuMottlhiotca o
Basakcwilowawililema ;
luuihta o piiliikisoma
ktUta kUkwdicd tapwali'
toa a mockekah'tumilicke^

with salvation ; aud her
Faints shall shout aloud
for joy " (Psalm cxxxii.
16).

XFAIVS OF IJKLATlONSHir.

In vc'I'Lh rx])ix^ng ix^lutionsliip thoiv is some
ambijipnty which is puzzling to a beginner, and not
to a bc'ginncr onl^', ns I find great hesitation in most
natives of the country, and feel it strongly myself,
Avhen huddenly lisked to express some forms of
i^elationship transitively, but more , especially in
ri'ference to faither and motherhood.

Th« intransitive verb soon becomes familiar:

Net ot-owashimish-in.

r have a child or

children.
I have a father.

That is my father.
That is my child.

Net ot-aw-in,

Wela uwukwana notawe, or
Wela awukwcna wAtaweyan,
Wela awukwana net owashi-

mish, or
Wela uwukwaua wiltowashimish-oyan.

In the first example in either case of these two
last sentences, no verb whatever is used, and, literally
translated, they run thus : Ue, that one, my father ;
He, that one, my child.

In the latter example ihfi v^^tb \% ^^^s^ S:^ "^s^
Ait-vowcl form of ttic »\\\>yaxic^A.N^ ^fi^sj^^ v«>^^i2^ws^
wuiring that mood: \\<5^ >i5a»X. o\tfi^ V>aw^ ^^>
« lather.
The rcUtivo awii pUVu TO>ttswv^>^^

TUE VCRII.

201

been used iiiBteod of iku flat vowul ; aSi Weill iiwu-
kwaiia ka otawcyau, ho that one whom I have (for)
u father ; but tbu'other in the preferaUo czprciiioii.

The transitive verb with rcqiect to childron is
elcar ; as. Net ot-owaahimiaho-nioWy I look on him
as my ohild, he is my ehild ; Net ot-owashimisho-mik^
he looks on mo as ms child, I am his child.

N'otanisemow,
N'okosisemow,

She is my daughter.
He is my son.

But the correlative tcims urc not so simple ; thus
Otawemao has a double si^iification.

1. He looks on him as his fatlier, lie is his father.

2. lie fathers him, is a fath<T to him.

X'otawcmow,

X'otiwcmik,

X'otawcmow,

N*otawcmik,

N'okawcmow,
X*okawemik,

1 look on him as my father,

he is my father.
I am his father,
r father him, I adopt him.
He fathers me, adopts me, or

stands godfather for me.
1 mother him, adopt him.
iShc mothers me.

All these are verbs of the third conjugation, like
Wapum&o.

There is another verb in the language having two
and opposite significations, namely, Apuchehau, ho
uses him as a servant, and, he serves lam. The con-
text alone gives the sense intended.

In the inanimate the inverse form only is used ;
OB, i\rV>tawemikon sakokicvi&wm^ \jftN^ V^^^^l^ ^sa. Ta»
OM Its Atber, I sm the iatbcx cS Viv^

«
I

4

202

TlIK VERB.

ExampLts in Vcrb% of Eclattoiiship*

Eo itiko, Keshpin Kiclic-
muncto feakoBiaimUJctca^

Ko tilpwuliwa, il itikot,
Kukwan kil totnttak,
Jesus, Kichcmunoto
WakonnmiBk ?

No ko tipachimon owa
a okoaUimikot KIcLeinu-
uctowa,

Wusa misewil A itusboyilk
let ot'OiC€uhtm{MMik'
owow Klchomuueto il
ta])wriyAloinuk Christ
Jcsns,

Jesus ittui's Krshpiu Abra-
ham %eiit-cw<uhim»himtt'
tahca ke ka totumwat-
owow Abraham ot avo-
towiua.

Inanimate

Wmta niicko ka ot^teashi-
mishimikotchik omalcw
iiskelcw awasita kukil-
tawillotumwukil anisku
pimatisitchik ishpish
uiioko ka ot-ineaMhimiMh'
tmikotchlk wasAyasovr*
iuilow,

Miaowik keUwow kd ol-

•«

He said to him, If thou
be the Sou of God"
(Matt. iv. 3).

•• They cried, saying unto
Iliui, What havo wo
to do with thee, Jesus,
thou Sou of God?"
(Matt. viii. 29).

** I bare reoord that this
is the Sou of God"
(John i. 34).

** For ye are all the chil-
dreu of God by faith
iu Christ Jesus " (Gal.
iii. 20).

** Jesus saith unto them.
If yo were Abraham's
children, yo would do
tho works of Abraham "
(•John viii. 39).

FouM.

*' For the children of this
world are in their
generation wiser than
tho children of light"
(Luke xxi. 8).

.^^^fc•

Tin VSBB.

2aa

AwukMnineo wAolie otiti- ** For whioh tliingB* mJco
kon-achik Klohomuno- tho wrath of God

Cometh on the chfldren
of disobodienoo ** (CoL
in. 6).

owaskUhdc, light** (Eph. r. 8).

In this aontenoo the noon waMwmf Ug^ i*
changed into an adjectiye, or acquires a poHeMive
character, by the addition of the final e.

tovra ot akolQwftaewin-
ilcw niiekc tod<-oioa«&t-
miMmikoiekik anw&jA-
letnmowinilew,
FimotOk tapiflkodi waM- '^Walk as childxen of

( 204 )

rii

niE ADVEUB.

Adverik^ cx]UV88 time, place, quantity, and manner ;
and qualify verbB, udjiHStiveti, and other adverbs.
Thvy may bo dividinl into sovoral classes, acconlini;
to their signification.

!• Advekh^ ov Intkiuuwatiox.

When ?

Tanis[>e?

Tanta ?

Tancwa ?

Tanowu ?

Tanfike, or TanAko wuchc?

Tan' isse, or Tanrisho?

Tan iHhpish, or Tan usiiiche ?

'fanu ilokok, or Tuuillekok ?

Where?
AVhorc is he ?
Where is it?
"NVhorefon-?
How?

How much?
]Iow long? How far?
How many?
Tan -tut wow ? H« »w many times ?

In all thcHO oxpresbions, the initial ))ortion of the
wonl is the intorrogatiTo pronoun, Tanfi^ what : thus,
Tanisix) is Tan, what ; isiio, when s What when ?

'11

fan tut4» ?

I118[X3

i^e. At what time ?

2. Adveriis ov 'Yvu^ Ptcat^jiV,

TlIE ADVERD.

205

Auoch mukwacli,
An6ch & keshikak,
Andch k& keshikak.

Anoch ka keshikak,
Aiioch kasliikak,

3. Adverbs of Time. Pati.

During this time.

Now it being day = to-day.

To-day (spoken of the por-
tion of the d&y yet U>
come).

To-<lay (spoken of the por-
tion alroady iNwt).

To-day, the day jiast.

I skonak,

ljKj>iii,

Anoch-irka,

Waskuch,

Kayash,

AslJ,

Astuin-ibpc,

Awu8-ispc,

l*atima,

Naka,

Kakesliai^

< )t{ikoshik,

Awiis otukoHhik,

I -awus-otukoshik,

IVpoonok,

Sekwunok,

Xopinok,

Tiikwakok,

Kuku,

Since.

Since, ago.

A short time since.

Formerly, long ago.

Long since.

Already.

»Since.

Before.

Afterwanls.

After a while.

This luoming.

Yesterday.

The chiy before yesterday.

Two daysbefureyestorday.

(During) last Winter.

Last Spring.

Last Summer.

Last Autumn.

At len<rth.

KowbJnva,
I'atima,

iabkwa^

4. Adverbs of Time, Future.

MlCT.

Tiy-a\A-\>^-
TroBCiiVXj*

206

THE ADVcnn.

Numa milikwa,

Wcpuch,

Wcpuch nawuoliy

Wenkata,

Ka wapaky

Wapnku,

Not yet.
Soon.

Tolerably nouiu
At Homo time or oUicr.
To-morrow.

To-morrow; wliouitHhall
be daylight.

ThcM^ t>vo last are ix)rtioiis of the Impemoual
Verb, to which tlie Htadent is referred.

5. Adverbs oi>' Tivk. ludrfiMte.

Mukwachy

^loshuk,

Kakeku,

Kakeku iiuHlita kakcka,

Ni^yanekotuueka,

Askow,

AnIcow, ankow.

Kiiiwruih,

Kiuwashisli,

Pituma,

Numa-weskat,

Aka-weskat,

Kiituti»wu,

Askune-ki'tihik, or

KupTi-koshiky

Akospe,

Ni*ttlitum,

Iskwayach, Machicli,

J^aamoiilic, Amoy&,

Kcfshkwa, Itlvrtotui^

Ifcchatwow,

AVheii.

While.

Always.

Ever, always.

For ever aud over.

Sometimes.

Oecasioiially.

Now and then.

A long time.

A rather long time.

A moment.

Never.

Never (im|X}ratively).

Suddenly.

Throughout the day.
At that time.
First.
Last.

Tins ADVBBJI.

207

6. Advbum of Place.

Ota,

Unta, NAta,
AkoU,
iJhikopOk,
ruBhoch,
i )ta itaka,
Unta itakii,
Ayetow,
KwiUkitu,

Mochek,

Ishpimik,

Ohupashesli,

(Ttamuskek,

Walow,

Here.

There.

At that very plaoa.

Near the water.

On thiasicle.

On that side.

On each aide.

On the other aide.

Everywhere.

On the gronnd.

Above.

Below.

Beneath the earth.

Far off.

7. Adverbs or Quaktity and Xuxber.

A little.

ApishcHhy Manaheeh,

Mistaho,

Mi8bew&,

Puske,

Naho,

N'a-ilokoky

Xotow,

Alowaky

Alowak, •

Much.

The whole.

A part.

Exac:tly.

The exact quantity.

Short of it.

A considerable quantity.

Exceeding.

8. Adverbs of Quality and Maheee.

TaT^iVkooh,

Petoehf
Kwayuak^
Suke,

A\\k&«

208

THE ADVERH.

rri-imyuk,

Mcua,

Xaspicli,

Kctwani,

IVikacb.

IViyatnk.

l*wa«towi»,

Kelip)>o,

Su{;c)ick(>cli,

Kiiiiocli,

SbaNhkwat,

Slmkril,

Sbakocli,

MaiuuHkacb,

Pcsbisbik,

\iiKpac1i,

^Lina.

Katiitowul,

Ote,

A]HKbeka,

Tcko,

^Io>\iitcbc,

Nunania, Wiuimwii,

I'ukwuntow,

Collcctivelv.

< )uo bv one.
Again.

< >ver again.
Slowly.
Carefully.
Lingeringly.
Quickly.
Suddenly,
(iratuitously.

< )pcnly.
Secretly.
Witbout caufle.
"Willingly.
Positively.
Wonderfully.
Alone.
Wrong.
Seemingly.
Suddenly.

In tbis way.

Even, to wit.

Even.

Only.

Collectively.

Di8}>er»odly.

Nonsensically.

0. Adverbs of Comparisox.

Nawucb,
Awasituy

Solui, Soke, AloVoV,
Alesach,

THE ADVEBB.

20»

Ukuwach,
Osum, VfS^
Mitone,
Kayapidiy
MwuchOy

Scarcely.
Too much*
Entirely.
Still, the same.
Exactly.

ri«.

10. Adveuds of A>tiiuiatiox.

Tapwu, Truly.

K&chenash, Certainly, truly,

Chikama, Chik&manima, To be sure.

AA, Yes.

Kayam, Be it so.

11. Adtecos of N^XJATIo^^
Numa, Numawela, No, not. (Used with the

Aka,

indicative mood.)
No^not. (Imperative and

subjunctive.)
Not. (Im^ierative.)
Oh no.
None at all.

Akawcla,

Numa*n8u,

Niima-wawach,

12. Adverbs of Doubt and Uncertainty.

Tan-uko Tane-piko, | j ^ , ^
Tanse-piko, Tanoma-piko, )
Maskoch, Perliaps.

Atoka, Atoka, Otuku, I suppose.

Kistonoch, ProlMibly.

Mcskow, IW chance.

Owanekan-toku, Who it is I don't know.

Kukwan-toku, What it is I don't know.

Tho two last are used in answer to the questions, i
lVioisit?or,\V\iat\i^\\.'> ^ ^ ^

These are ?ot .^1 tW^^^^^

\

210

THE ADVERB.

Verbs derived from Adverbs.

Many verbs aro derived from adverbs ; as, from»

Apibhesb, a little ; ApisheBheshew, he is small ;

Nahe, exactly; Nahitin, it blows exactly, the
wind is quite fair ;

Osam, too much; Osamitonew, he has too much
month, he is a babbler ;

Alewak, exceeding; Alewakishkowuuy he excels
him.

ExamjfleM of Adcerhs.

Tauinpc wciia kil tukoshi- When wilt thou come

nun ? again ?

Taucpil'o ; uumawcla no I dou*t know.

kiskuletan,

Ilero either of the clauses would have sufficed to ex-
press the meaning, but they are generally combined.

Where is thy j'oungor
brother ?

Tanid utat keshem ?
.^«ilii kewu«'» wekik.

Tan-ulekok kil itapicho-

yun?
TaneMO-ptl-o ; ht$tenach

askune pipook ne ka ita-

pichen,-
Tan-at^ehe keshikak o-

noehf

Tanako ; tukl tcepueh maB-
hoek kutta niatwfitin,

He has already returned

to his tent.
How long shalt thou be

absent ?
I don*t know ; probably

I shall be absent the

whole winter.
How much of the day is

it now? What is the

time?
I don't know; perhaps

the bellv?\LVv*s^V«i?5^%

TlIB ADVEIIB.

211

Weskat na ko ka lepwa-

kan?
Numaweskat no ka lepwa-

kan not italotun, iapwa^
Tone ka ithe ni^Mihaku-

nowit JosuB?

Wilt thoa over be pm-

a©nt ?
I vorily think I shall

iioTor 1)0 prudent.
In what manner vnm

JofiOB put to death ?

Ko chcstaskowaknnowoWy lie was eraeifiod.

Vkawack no go jamotan,
Ko tupwatik kokawo :

n'tawapim ; ketikack

n'tuwapim,
Ko Kakohow na una ka

nutuwulomiHk ?
JVttma*ft«a,
Alekoh lotin,
Aka t()ta,
Ko ko ni]>ahowuk na nic-

chat sheshepuk otako-

shik f
Numa waicach, or
Numa icawach piljuk,
Kwuskatiso nuikwadi a mi-

lopimutiseyun,
Meskoio no ke miskowow,
Kelippc >viini6ka,
NaspicJi tcalow uo ka ito-

tan,
SItdshkicat no ko pukwa-

tikwuk,
Kimoch no ko pooho natik,
Mawitclie nesJttum^ or
Mawuclte wfntkuch ko tow

Ayumewin^
JSaiuiowal ko pukiBl;mi*
wulc il pono pimatiBitr
otdk.

I can scarcely walk.
Thy mother calls thee;

go to her; go to hor

at onoo.
Dost tliou love him who

dosiros thee ?
No ; I do not.
It Ih blowing very hard.
Do n(»t do it.
Did you kill many ducks

yesterday ?

None at all.

Not even one.

Koix)nt while you are in

good health.
I found him by chance.
Make haste and get up.
I shall go very far away.

ct

They hated mo with-
out a cause.'*

lie camountome secretly.

**In tho beginning was
the Word?

^rg^

( 212 )

THE CONJUNCTION.

Conjunctions are used to conuect words and
Mcntcnccs top^ther.

The principal oi>njanctii»DH aro :

NaHho, Maku, Nuidita nia- And.

ka,
Mcna (in 8(»mo dialoctv). And.

Usitclie,

A1m>.

Ako niaka.

And then.

NaiKlitii piki>, Apo,

Or.

Kcsb})in, KcsliaBhpiu,

If.

Kitthpin uka,

Unlcttti.

Maka^

But.

Ata^ Alowuk ata.

Altlum;;b.

AlcwAk nmka.

Novorthcless.

MifM>wach,

iS<» much tho more.

Awuko Wttcke w otckc,

For which cauao, there-

fore.

A,

That, because.

Kitchc,

That. (Used with tho

subjunctive mood to

ex\irc«ft tiA "Ea^^^ia&ji.VsBw-

%ik\\2w^>^

KoBliMhpinil«

A^ujna DAttliti,

THE ooavuircTioN.

218

AkanOshta,
Ishpifihy

Xor. ^Uaed with nib*

juuotiTe mood.)
For.
Than.

JEvampIet of OonjwMtioM.

Nola niUhta ncsliom.
No ka kochetan, nmna-
wcla molra not italotTin
l^he go totuxniin,
Keslipin uka kwfiskatiso-
yakwil, tapwa ke ka
nishowunatifiinowow,

Nc kiskfiletuii a miicho-
twayan,

Nuniawcla kiskrilomu-
%\^k Kfchomunetowa,
nwd'o teaehe niitawo
ki8kinohuma%viikiky

Numawola tai)writum,
nwna nashta tapw&tu-

_ miliwa otaweya,

AUwdk maka natatow,

Wiisa kot ittinowow,
Awasita no sakchow uh-

pi$h ostusa,
Ala a ko nutawapumii-

kiky numawela no tap-

watakwuk,

I and my brother.

I will try, but I doii*t
think 1 shall bo ablo
to do it.

If yo do not repent
(change yunr manner
of life), yo will cer-
tainly pcriHh.

I know that I am wicked.

They do not know God,
therefore I go to teach
them.

He does not believe it,
neither docs his &ther
believe it.

** Nevertheless let ns go
unto him.**

•* For I say unto you.**

I love him more than his
elder brother.

Although I have been to
them, they do not be-
lieve me.

Tl
«

■I
t

V

\

( 214 )

THE PREPOSITION.

A PREfOsiTiox expresses the relation, in vrhioh
nouns stjiud to eaeh otlier, to pronouns, or to verbs.
Propositions govern the accusative or locative case.
Xbe princi}>ul prepositions are :

Poclie,

"NVnskich,

Tukoch,

"NVukech,

Utamik,

Shcpji,

Shape,

Waska,

Chekicb,

Ishe,

Oclus

^lAkwilyusby

Kilikow,

Tust4)wieh,

Tiitawich,

Pashich,

Opima,

Otishkow,

OtanaV,

Peliah.

Within.

On the outside.

Upon.

On the top oL

Beneath.

Under.

Through.

Around.

Close to.

Towards.

From.

Among.

With, among.

Between.

In the middle.

Over (passing)*

\i\i5C^^^03D^»*

Pimicby
Iiskoch,
XJkamik,
Wulawotimik,

THK PSEPOSniOlf •

Across.

Ono aftor another.

On tho other side.

Outside.

In many cases a preposition, occasionally under-
going a little alteration, is joined to a snbstantiTe
termination, generally in the locative case, and thns
becomes an adverb ; as.

Chekipag,

Utamnskok,

Pctokumik,

Opimuskunak,

Tukotamutin,

Near the water.
Under the earth.
Within the house.
By the side of the road.
On the top of a hill.

Many verbs aro derived from prepositions; as,
from,

Otishkow, Otishkowekajiowestowad, he stands in
front of him ;

Ochc, Ochehao, he prevents him ;
Shape, Shapopulew, it passes through.

Examples of Prepoiitions,

PecJie netuik no miskun

mechut ka malatnk,
Tukoch waskayekunik

upewxik mechut pela-

shishuk,
Shepa mcchcsonatikok

owashishuk matuwu-

wuk,
Tdiatoick wekik npepun.

Within my heart I find
much that is wicked.

On the top of the house
many birds aro sitting.

•

Under tho table the chil-
dren are playing.

No ke wapumow .oti.Wca» T^ •^^t"^'" """^
ajriimeftwekiiinik.okt

1
I

i

\

\

21G

THK PRETOeiTIOX.

Mekowamik ko icke wa-

lawoWy
Ne ke itiistan j>0e^ miati-

kowutik,
Nepowownk woMka isbko-

Ok,

IIo went out of the tent.

I Imvo ))liaoed it witliin

tho box.
They are etanding round

tho fire.

JIM \

IM'

i

!

< 217 )

THE INTEBJECTION.

iNTisRJScnoiro are words usod to expren anddoa
CDiotions of tho mind.

The principal interjections arc :

0,0,0!

Sha!

Apishkun !

Wawl or Wahl

How I How sa !

Kwachistuk !

Tasowal Tasowa neya-
nako!

Yakwa I

Yoho!

Astuml

Awus!

Kayam I or Eejam I

Akoshe !

Matika I

Chest !

Ma!

Akoebaue I
Akot&t
Akol
ABbkwt^l

I thank you.
Expression of angry

surprise.
What a bother !
What do you say? Eh?
Now then I
Alas!
It is a great pity ; it is

very strange !
Take care !
What now !
Come here !
Away with you !
Be it so!

Never mind ; be it so !
Behold !
Look!
Listen !

^«M5ir

218 THE IinrEDJECTlOX.

lilato ! Lot mo soe !

Puk>viintow ! Noiisonso I

N'tuma ! I wish it I

Euma ! May it bo so I

Example$ of InferJcdioMn

Wa niushkowesoyiin ! How strong you arc !

Sha ! ktraehistuk I naspick How very, very sod I it
inucluiletakwiin, in very bod, reprehen-

sible.

Awns, niacha, Satan ! Got thee henoo, Satan !

Ma / Kalkwan jKutumuk ? Listen I What is that wo

hoar?

Maiila ! aslil tukoshin. Behold ! he is already

come.

JDt:o«/iaM<>/ kolamiloutoo- Well done I thou good
skulalran, servant.

Ako t Ako ! ko jtAhittin, Now, now ! I wait for

thoo.

AMtea ! Htkbta pituma. Wait ! wait a moment.

( 2J9 )

SYNTAX.

Syntax is that part of grammar wliicU treuts of
the coDBtnictioQ of aentonces: and thia depe&da on
the agreoment, govemniont, :iDd arrangctiient of tho
words of which they iiro compoeod.

Bule I. — Au intrnneitiYO verb must agree with
its nominative in laimher and poreOD ; ai

Uneke ililcwuk kinokapowewyk,
Thofio men they are talk

4

Rule II.— An intraniiitiTe verb mnot ngrce with its
nominative as to geiidor; an animate Hubtitantive
reqniring the animato form of the verb, an inani-
mate BubHtantivo tho inaniniato form ; as,

Owa mixtik mishikitow,
This tree lie is big.
Oma niitttikuwut mitthow.
Thin Imx it is larger.

Snle HI. — Two or nwiro MUgalftT nuuaa coimeot«d
by nds/ila or other co^iAa.twe. tway^'*-'^^ ""*^""'*
the verb to be in the pYimA-, a»,

I and my motici -"o »»

220 SYNTAX.

AkIiT ko macbowuk notawe nuHhta

Already thoy buve gone ufT, my father and
niBtas,
older brother.

Rule IV. — ^Two or more Minppilar nouuH Heparated
bv nashta piho or upo^ require the wrb to be in the
mngiilar; an,

John n/lshta piko Jamcn wopuch kuttii tukoshin,
John or JamcH H«M>n ho will come.

Kulo V. — ^Whcn a transitive verb is joined to ti
pronoun of the firnt or Kccoud persons, and a nouu
or pronoun of the third person, tlio abbreviated form
of the first «>r second person always precedes th<*
verb; as,

Xc pimitishawow,
I follow him.

Ne piniitinlmhok,
Me he follows.

Ko. wtlpinun,
'l^hou castcst it away.

Ke wilpinikon,
Thee it casts away.

Kulo VI. — ^^Vhen the first and second persons are
joined to a verb (whichever of them may be thi*
tmbject), the abbreviated form of the second person
always precedes the verb ; as,

Ke kiskillemittiu.
Thee I know.

Ke kiskillcmin^

Bulo YII. — VTbeik two tranBitive Tcrbt aro con-
nected TOoiprocal]y« so that the Bnbject of the cue is
the object of the other, one of them takes the inTenHi
form; as,

Sakehilo, sakehiko nAshta*

He loves hiiu, he is loved by him, and. I

Sakehi&o & sakehikot, |

lie loves him because he is loved by him. !

Bulo Vni. — ^Transitive verbs govern the accusa-
tive catie ; as,

■

Ke wulawetishowuii misowa iskwawa nalshta ^

He sent out all the women and i
ifwasliisba,

children. {

Ee Bukinum nipolcw, ;

Ho poured out water.

When p^ovomed by a verb in the first or second «

])or8onB, the accusative is the same as the nomina-
tive; as,

Xe wetupcmow nekawe, J

I sit with her my mother.

Xe wctupemik nokawe.
Mo she sits with, my mother.

Bulo IX. — Wlicn one verb in the third person

governs another in the third person, whether transi- j

tive or intransitive, the verb governed is put in the ^

relative or accessory cose ; as, :

Kist&lcm&o a milotwaliche, I

He honours Yiim \>(^cvQ«6\i\:k S3& ^g^* j^

Kutta wun\s\\Vw[i«.o V^x^W^^^^ \

Ho wiU rai«i tViem u^ ^>^^ ^^ ^^' ^

1

\

222 SYNTAX.

Wlicn a verb a^^recs with a iionn in the accusative
cnso, it asKumcB the rchitive form ; an,

Ko ituhhowatnii opotachckilwa kitche pota-
IIc commanded them the trumpeters to blow
chokuliche,
their trumpets.

Hxkio X. — AMicn in EngliKh a noun in the posses-
fiivc is followed by its governing nominative, the
verb agreeing with tbe latter takes the relative
form; as,

Notawo ottlma ashT uipilewa,

Hy father Jiis dog already his him is dead.

James o chikahikun uanpich kaHhalew,
JamcN his axe very his it is sh(u:p.

The subjects of relation and possession have been
already largely treated i»f under Etymology.

Rule XI. — One verb governs another in the sub-
junctive mood ; as,

Ke ka HikclAMin kitche wnpumittan,
I shall be glad that (to) see thee.

Kutta kochetow kitche oshetat,
lie will try that (to) make it

( 223 )

PARSING.

If the student is desirous of making rapid and
substantial progress in the language, there is nothing
I would recommend nioi-e strongly than that ho should
<levoto much attention to parsing, or the analyzing
of the different partH of which a sentence is com-
posed. It should be done tlioroughly, and per-
severed in for a long time. Every noun, pronoun,
and verb sliould bo gone tlirough in their various
inflexions and moods ; by which means a facility in
the use of the most puzzling and troublesome forms
in the language will be attained with a rapidity
which will astonish even the student himself..

1 will now parso a few sentences, and shall l)e
mistaken if the few following pages should not be con-
hiderod one of the most valuable portions of the book.

Ne sakchow nckawe.
I love her my mother.

Nc The contracted form of the per-
sonal pronoun nela, first person
singular.

Sakelioto A verb transitive with pronominal

affix, 8akeh being the verbal root,
from takcliuoy he loves him ;
indicalW^ \vioo\^ ^tc^^kc*. x^scak^

direct; fef^^^^^^'^^^^^"^^^.
repeat ixidicaUNe m^^. ^-twi^.^.

224 PARSING.

teuse, direct and inverse, and snb-
jnnctivo mood, direct and inverse,
tog(»t]icr with the parts express-
ing the action of the first and
second piirsons on each other.

No A possessive adjective pronoun,

Monging to kawe.

Kawe The contracted form of okawe--

MOW, mother, which it assumes^
when joined i<» a possessive pn>-
noun of the first or second persons ;
when joined to a pronoun of the
thinl person, the syllable a or ya
is added.

Here repeat Nekawe, my mother^
etc., etc.

Ton say thiM is laborious work. Bo it so; the
results will well n*pay the labour. It was formerly
my own practice, and it is the one I adopt now when
teaching the language verbally to others, and, by
its resultH, I am well satisfied of its great use.

Wapukil no ka pmin milopimatisoyanu.

To-morrow I shall go oflf (by water) if I am well.

Wapnlu An adverb.

Nc Contracted fonn of first personal

pronoun singular.
Ka rarticle expressing futurity in

first and second persons, indicative

mood.
P<mn Verb intransitive, firstoonjugation,

root pot^ indvoalv*!^ TsxvaRiL^ V^^ss^

PAMIXQ.

MilcpiwuUiteifaM.. A compoand word, from wtio,

good, and mmaiuem^ ho livcfi;
vorb intranmtivo, first conjugation,
subjunctive mood, faturo om-
ditional tense, first person sin-
gular.

Eiofacmuneto itushowatnO kukinow ililewa

God so commandoth them all pcoplo
kitche kwilskatisiliche.
that they repent.

KldicmunHo A compound wonl, from iieftr,

great, and muneto^ a god ; a noun,
animate gender, nominative t«>
verb itURhowatuo.

Ilushoieaidd A particular transitive verb, from

ithe^ it, so, and duthowatdo^ he
commands him ; indicative mood,
present tense, third person singu-
lar, ogrccing with its nominative
Kichemuneto.

KuktHow Indefinite adjective pronoun, be-
longing to ililewa.

mietoa A noun, animate gender, third

person plural, accusative case,
governed by the transitive verb
itiishowatuo, according to Bule
VIII. Were it not for kukinow,
ililewa would be ambiguous, it
being cither a singular or plural
aoousative.

Kitche A conjunction, with generally a

lulUT^ salification.

f

I

22<i l*.\ USING.

ccmdition ; verb intransitive, finit
conjugation, relative mood, thinl
|>oi8on plural, agreeing with tho
accuBative ncmn ililowa, according
to Kulo IX.

Kukinow ililowuk kutta otishkawelcapowestowa-
All iKM>plo they will Htand boforo

wok JeHaMa iMlchu itotillitA kitche tipaskonekil-
liim JcHnM when lie 8liall ctrnic tliat ho

liche.
jmlgo.

Kukinor Indefinito adjective pronoun, be-
lt mging to ililewuk.

Ilileinik V noun, animate gender, third

]ierHon plural, nominative to tho
verb otinhkawekai^weatowttwuk.

Kutta ^i^n of futurity in tho third

]>er8on.

Oiifkkawchaponct- A word compounded of otlMow^
Mtiwaicuk in front of, kapo^ the ^mrticlo in

composition signifying to stand,
and Mtow^ a particle in composition
signifying before, to, in front of;
verb transitive, third conjugation,
indicative mood, future tense,
third jiorson ]>lural, agreeing with
its noininativo ililewuk, according
toKulel.

JesuMf A noun, animato gender, third

])or8on singular, aocusative case,
governed Vj XS^*^ \.\^xv>s^5v:^^ ^^^s^

I'flriH ATiaTl\c\^.i:x«K^\Y^^^^^^r^

iMdliia \ctV> \\\\.T«ifCi<\N^ ^^%X\v^^5?^

PABSZKO.

227

there, modified in its rignificatioii
hy the particle pdeke; relatiTe
mood, fatuiio oonditional tense,
third person mngolar, aneoing
with the aoonsative nonn Jeensa,
according to Rnle IX.

Kitche A oonjunotion, with genexally a

futnm signification.

TipatftoHckdlteke .. A verb mtranntiye of the third

conjugation, from tipaskonekAd, he
measures, literally with a iqBL;
relative mood, future tense, agree-
ing likewise with the accusative '
Jesusa.

Tupwuyalemuta Eichemuneto, kunawuletum-
If thou believe in him God, if thou keep

wuta o kukoskwHwina, ke ka milutota*

liiK them his commandment thou wilt do good to thy-
s«»n ; keshpinmaka anwatawuta tapwil ke ka
Kclf ; if but thou disobey him truly tboe will

kiHhewalemik.
ho be angry with.

Tapteayalemuid ... A verb transitive of tho third

conjugation, from tapwuy&lemfto,
ho believes him with the mind,
ale being the particlo signifying
the action of the mind ; animate,
subjunctive mood, future con-
ditional tense, second person sin-
gular direct, governing noun of
the third person singular.

Hidemuneto A. com^^tA 'vw^^ ^x^iaa^ He&««

atk\Tna.ti!^ fgKii^«c. ^tf*sw«5c«^ ^*"?!3l

I

m
I

t

\

\

\

228 PARSING.

tapwriyulemiita, which being in
tlie Hccond perMon, tho accusative in
the Hiinie in form as tho nominative.

KHHaujaIelHmufut& A verb tranKitivo and possessivo,

from kunawaletum, he takes carc«
of it with tho mind; inanimate*
third conjugation, Bubjunctivo
mood, future conditional tenHc,
Kccond penion singular diroct,
governing noun of tho third person.

O A posHCKsivo adjective pronoun.

l>elonging to kukaskwawina.

KukaskieutctMa ... A noun inanimate, from kukAski-

mewiui, lie advises, commands;
thii d person plural, accusative case,
governed by the transitive verb
kunawalctumwuta.

Ke Contracted form of the second

personal pronoun singular.

Ka Particle expressing futurity in

fii st and second persons, indicative
mood.

Mihtotawon A reflective verb, conjugated as

an intransitive of the fourth con-
jugation, from nitio, good, and
totawdd, he docs it to him ; in-
dicative mood, future tense, second
person singular.

Keshpin A conjunction.

MaJca A conjunction.

Antt&tawuta Verb transitive and animate of

the third oon^u\g\tvoTkx fesissk ^ssc*:^-

•

PAitttNO. 229

Tapwii An adverb.

Kb Contracted form of tho aooond

))orBonal prononn singalar.

Ka Particle oxpreaungfntnrity in tho

first and second poraona, indicative
mood.

KUkeKdIewttk Verb transitive and animate of

tbe third oonjagation, from klshe-
w&loiniio, he is angry with him,
which is from hi$ewa§em^ ho is
t^giyt and ale^ particle exprewing
the action of the mind ; indicative
muod, future tense, first person
Bingular inverse, having tliird
person singular for its subject.

Owana teapwayulemikwa numaweskat kutta
Whosoever bclievoth on me never will

pone pimatisew.
cease he lives.

Owikna liolative pronoun which, influenced

by tho verb to which it is the
nominative, becomes a compound
relative animate, singular, nomi-
native to verb teupwayiilo)Qikw&«

Teapwdyalemiheii Verb transitive and animate of

tlie third conjugation, from tapwu-
yulemuo, he believes in him ; dubi-
tative mood, flat vowelled, first
person singular inverse, having \
third person singular for its i !

JVumawakai AuaANwV ,

^-o *x^v^^-»^^

#

i

\

\

.230 PARSING.

Ptmatiscto A componnd word from |nm, simpli-
fy inp; movement, and alii^ moral
or physical condition; verb in-
tmnsitive, first conjugation, in-
dicntivo mood, future tennc, third
person singular.

AXALYZATION OF A SENTENCE.

O sLawiLlcchikawin Tapalcmittuk Jesus Christ.
Tlis grace lie p>verning us Jesus (^hriht

ko ka wo wecho tushckumikowanowow.
you may his it remain ivith.

O lli«, the contracted form of tceh^

tlio third pergonal ])ronoun siii-
;;ular; in tlio plural it takes tlio
form (htcow ; o becoming the pro-
fix of the noun, and viow its affix,
uH o shawulechikuwinewow, their
j;racc.

Skatrdlcckihawin >. <jiraco, from sha\c;llechikm>, he

favours, from the root »haical*\
and r/ftlvco, the verbal ending of
the intiansitivo form of the verb,
with trin, the teiminating particle
of abstract nouns.

TapahmiUuk A verb transitive in flat-vowel

form, from ti}iulemrio, he g(»vemK
him ; it is composed of the ro4»t
tipale^ flat vowclled, and nUttuk^
the pronominal terminiQLtioT\^«.v^g^>

luuod.

i*ARSiN«:. 231 !

Kekaweteeclustiuibekannloicanawatr, ThiBisastraiigo- !
looking^ word, for iu reality it is but one, an tho firot
portion of tho pronoun Jcelawow in itis commonoe-
mcnt, and owow its termination ; it is^ in fact, a kcu-
tenoe in a word.

Kc Firnt ]Kirticlo «>f tho pi^monn ;

kclawow.

Ka *Si^ <>f futurity in first and Kccund

porMoDB, indicativo mu<Kl. ^

We Optative ])articlo.

Wrrkc Particlo Dignifying iriVA, omh- ;

]iainonKhip.

Ttuhcka J{iM)t of verb, nignifying abiding,

Kojouniing.

Mik Prononniial particle, indicating .;

that the subject of tho verb is of '
the third i>cr8on, the c»bjcct of tho
firHt or Kocond |)erKon.

Oicnn The verbal posscsHiv*' particle,

nliowing that the real subject of
tlic verb is not the animate third
l^orson, which it would have been
liad wi^' ended tho word, but
Komething inanimate belonging
to the animate third jierHon, his it.

Oicnw The terminating syllables of keln-

wow. '

Arrangement ok Words in a Sentence, ;

i

The Cree language dtxjs not follow so rigid a •
rulo as tho EugWAi nv\\.Vw \w^<i.t to the position of j
words in a Bentcncc^, Vi^J^'t \^Tm\\^ ^1 Wvs. \.^w^%^x. v

2:;2

PAItHlNa.

'Wapiikii menu nc ka tu-

kusliiniii,
Mrna wapuku nc ka tu-

ko»liinin.
No ka tiikijfihiniu wapu-

ku uicua.
No ka inkuhliinin iiicna

wupuka.

To-morrow again I will
como.

Again to-morrow I will
como.

I will como to-mi>rrow
again.

I will como again to-
morrow.

The only tranNpiisition ini|»OKsiblo is that of the
nominativo future iKirticlo and vorb ; thcKO muKt
always htauil in <mio onlcr.

In couhtructing sentonceH comi>oHoiI of Kovcnil
clauses, the arrangement may bo much aa in Englisli,
and if the rules of Etymology and Syntax havo been
observdl, the Ktudent will Ito understood by au
Indian; the dilHculty will bo his understanding the
Indian in' return, from the changeable way in which
wonls may bo ai ranged. Let him, then, study well
the examples given in this work, and let him very
frequently writo d«)wn si>ntonccs just as thoy aro
spoken by au Indian in answer to his questions.
Thev mav sometimes seem to him mere nonsense,
but n(»t m(»ro so probsibly than Latin does to a
))eginiKT ; they have puzzled mo again and again, but
by-aiid-by the apptirently chaotic assomblago of
wordH havr arranged themselves in their prosier
places in the mind, my e.ves have been opened, and
I Iiave seen clearly that, not the Indian expressions,
but my own ignorance has been at fault.

I now give three |Kipers, as examples of the Croc
idiom and the arrangement of words in sentenocs.
The flr^t I wrote down siuxiQ Ivdel^^ >scgi»^ Vkwow ^^sw
7i)<?ian s dictation ; tVk^ lecouJi Va w \(oTSass^ v^ ^^
indiau*^ prayer; the t\ut^^ «v\ \tASk^ ^"^^W^
y^rittcn by a natWo lu t\\o «y\\«XAa ^i^x^^^

PARSING.

23:^

1. An Indian^s Account of Ike Condition of h%9
People when in a State of Heatkeniifm,

NoHpicli no ko muchopimatisin 'wunkuch numa kuk-
Very I wurt bail formerly not any-

wan no kiskulotun piko Mncbomunoto inhpiah ka
thing I know it only the devil of lob/; •• 1

pimatisoyan; iniscwri ililownk ne ke wapumownk mo-
lived; all the Indians It saw tbem al-

8huk a mnchepiniatiBitcbik, a notenittochik,

ways they being wicked when they fight with each other,

u kcBhkwupuchik, a inukoshilcliik, a mituwitchik,
when they get drunk, when they foast, when they oonjuro.

a kosapatukik, il kelaskitchik ; muisku*

when they pretend to prophesy, when they lie ; he takes fmiu

niiui wowa, nutopowiik, naspicU saketowuk,

him by force his wife, they ask for liquor, much they liko it,

utawilwuk, kiraotaskawnk, kiBOwahao

they buy it, they rob (other) people's lands, he angers them,

wccho ililewa, uospich tapwa ko muchcpimatisewuk.
his fellow-Indians, very truly they were wicked.

2. Portion of an Indian'it Prayer,

Jesus, ko nuiiaskoniittin miscwa ililowuk oclio :
Jesuti, thee I than k all Indians on account of :

wccbcbin ko kukaskwawina ; isbpimik Nota-
help me thy commandments (to keep); above Our

wonan bbawalcmin ko inusbkawisowin ; naspicb
Father have merry on me thy strength ; greatly

liC tapwatan. a \\\*^^\.>\\si\«i V»e.Vi\kL nusbta
I bcliove it iba\ lYiou ^^«mc*\.\N. V«.x^y ^

...ko; ko kuku.W^;;m^--2^^- .:^^«^^
cnrth ; thy oommaTadmci^Va w^^v

\

\

2^4 rAUSix<;.

iiKtilko kitoho iniloslicHhii net acliakosli kola
they may bo Uiui ho iimy bo beautiful my soul thou

kitcho otinut kitcho sakottvyan il milwANh-

that thou may^t rccoivo liiin that I may love it it being

ik kct Hynmcwin ; monhuk no ka apnchctan tapwil
;7nocl thy wonl ; always I will uio it truly

no wo mitotan, ne wo nakottm u milwuletuinnn ;
1 wish to attend to it, I wish to lovo it ai I think it good ;

wcchchin ko kiclio kukAskcvt'iwin nrishta no woclia
hclpmv thy great couniiandntcnt and my eom*

Wiiknn. tuKtowicli n<nM>wo u ncHlioyak; owa
{Minion ' (wife) between itind thou wo being two; this

ncwckcmaknn no Kikclrisin kola ko ko lumat-
ray tent companion (wife) I um ghul thou thou diust savo

chi:bc»w u aktwit. No wo itapin isbpimik

her Khc lioing sick. I wish to look there odoyc

i'inIio u)»it Kichcniunoto ; Jqswh WaKlioliut
when* ho sits God ; Jesus thou 3Iakcr of him

udiakirtdi, niitono koAcna notu& ; naKpicli no
tho soul cutiroly e]e:ui80 it my heart; much 1

pnkwatan no muchopiraatisowin, 8<»ka wapina
hato it my evil livin;?, 8trong]y cast it away

a uialatiik ; awanita no wo sakohow Johuh ; n'iiima
it being bad ; more I wish to love him Jesus ; I desire it

kot achak kitcho wawAidiohat net achakoHha ; mo-
thy Spirit that he prepare him my soul ; al-

idiuk no ka tapwatowow Jcsuh; a wapuk
ways I will buiic%*o him Jesus; when tho day breaks

a wa]>atnmun a keshikak wcchchin a utooskayaii
when I Mco it it being day help mo when I work

kitcho iiiclcynn ko nitiAhkawcHewin ; Mhawfilemin
Uiai thou givo mo thy strength; Iuiyo men^ q»>^xs«^

iliiho kitcinakisoyau kct\i*\)iA«iMAA\a&Ok.Ti^

uccording to iny potcriy tXk«^ 1 \aFMX Va. '^^ ^^i^ds^

ilwosakohittaii x^a^'w^^^^^V^^^^ ^«^^

<*• Wi^ a dcdw to lot© ihto ^wadfi^l '^>5^«^ ^^^

I

PARSINiJ. 23«*>

Iiln, niimawola no ka go miBkan i>ta lu^kck

mo, net I Mball bn ublo to lind it lierc on Uio earth

patima ishpimik u tiikwuk u milwoHhik kela ko |
by-and-by abovo it being it being good Thoa thou \

ka waputilin tapwutiimuml ko kicho kukaskwilwin,
wilt show me if I believe it tlir great eommandmont*

iiaspich no milwalctrin a wcchebeyuu onuch ka
very 1 am happy because thou lielpe»t mo now this !

kcshikak uo ko ayuiiiotan iicnhtQiu

Way I bavoboen speaking about it (at reading it), lint

ka ko Dshctawapiina a tukwuk kct nhvupewin |
that which thou didst make that there bo tliy rest

oma anoch ka kesliikak. [

this now day.

I), An Indian's Adccnturc. !

Ililcw ni])akcw«lkop\m, a ko iiiitowasli

An Indian Nvas returning home at night, having been hunt*

kfit, Hakaliikunik mitowiikam pimatakaK- •

iii^ beaver, in the lake far from the shore lie was walking

k()])un, ot asbkuu piininekatahuinokopiiii,

on the ice, his icc-chiscl he >vas carrying it on his shoulder,

^lifitnscwa * inaka ko opalioliko. Ko wapu-

a Roc, and ho was miscd up by him (flying). lie saw

mriii kotukcya ililcwa a wastuwalichc, fiko

them other Indians making signs with their hands, and

inaka asho tupwat, ** ]\listn8cw no pimaholik

then he so cried out, '* The Hoc me ho is currying off (flyiogX

kelawow ka wastawayak." Naspich maka a ish-
you who arc mailing signs.*' Very and where it

papiBkalik ko isho pukitaboliko itta Sl

is n high rock ho waa IbcK^ v^oc^cd by bim CAyins) whine the
isho t ushaliclio. 'ilo8^\v\]^L m^^V\0w3ia^"^cateiws« ^
jouDg ones (Rocs) note. X\x5«^% %^^ \.^^«.^«. s^^^

\
\

2'M* PARSiNi:.

u n'tawiiliot, miscwa mnka ttm-ckAna pfitalio-
ho liuiitin*^, oU and kinds of animals bo brings

Uy\\\ iitikwa, nashtii moosowa. Una ililow

tbem (flyinsX ^^^ <^'^^ niooKe. .Tbo Indian

iiaspich ke niiiiahckowao Mistiishisha, A uhIiu-
very well be attended to tbeir wantu tlio young Rocs, bo feed-
mat, wiichi8tonik il italicho misowil kilkwalew
ing tbcni in tbo ti^t tbey being tbero overytbing

totiimowAo. Kaka inechat wiit^kwaya piltahotow
bi* docs for tbum. At lengtb niucb bircb-bark bo brings it

Mi^tiisow, aku una ililcw i>aAi]»itnk, u wuchiHtonc-
tbo Hoc thou tbo Indian tore it up, making a urst for

kiiwat MiHtiisiwa. NaHpicli kiMpiikckwaHhckopau
tbem tbo Rocs. ^'^^y bo was beavily blunibcring

MiKtusew A nipat. Anhf innka wawiinulotum

tbo Koo wbcn sleeping. Already and bo is in doubt

ililcw ka totuk ; itulituni, '* No ka wckukwA
tbo Indian wbat bo sball do; bo tbinks, *' I will endeavour ti>

n]|)ahowiik ; uiato, no ka Htrnkawowuk inakwadi
kill tbem ; let mo sec, I will set iiro to tbem wbilo

A nipatchik wuskwak A ]>imiHhikik.** KAka
tbey beuig asleep on tbo btrrb-bark t!iey lying." At length

pAynkwow uiAkwach A niimtciiik ko 8U8kuwAu,
once wbilu tbey being asleep, be sot firo to tbem,

Ako wAtiituinuwat ot AHhkiin, inisowA

tbcn bo struck tbem re^*atedly (witb) bis icc-cbisel all

iiiaka ko iiipabAo. Ako iiiaka AtAlctuk, ** TantA kA
and bo killctl tbem. Tbcn and be tbougbt, ** How shall I

go kowAyaii ? ** IViyuk luaka MitftiiHiHhiMba ospisk-
be abltf to return ? ** One and young Roo bis

wunalow A HbekwukutAlik pocliibhomolo, Ako teyo-
back bis it being cbarred, ho crawU ui^H^^XSoM^ X^s^

tijwpnlchut naMlipicki u \A\\«\fv^^^\ ^^'^^,«^

io/ieJ himmiK (from) v«n VV\>c\vk^«.Vx^>^ w^i^^^?f^^

te ouuo to a tioii, bo conm ou!U Vq ^»^3^^ «**^^'

PASsmo. 237

liapatnm nskolew tapiskoch istakonuk

reach it with hit eyeu the cftrtht like pine hnith

& uspiBhomoiiekanewuk ishonakwnn

when one makes a \tod (in an encampment) it eo appeon

miBtikwnk & ishonnkoiiitchik ; Ako mena toyetipcnn-
thotrec* at tliey appear; then again he rolled

lohot, mcna kipiohipulew, Awuko oma nnke, Ako
himeulf, aguin hotiope, that(ia) this eartht then

vi&lnwet, uko mciiohat, ililewa oti-

hc came ont, tlicn he wont on his way* Indians he arrivce

tAo, Aka A nota mechesoliche peko A niilatumilicho,
at them, not they rightly eating, only thoy smelling it,

ilkwano A totumiliclio A niechesolicho ; ko iishu-
that is all they do when they eat; he was fed

miko roaka, uko xnaka pAyuk ot owaRhiniiBhiliwa
by them and, then and ono their children

ka kiHkinowapuinikot A mechcsot, xnena niaka
learnt from him by seeing him ho eating, agoin and

wAtctat ililewu, Awukwunche wewa nnmavrola
he arriYeil nt him an Indian, this rery ono his wife not

maka oclio klBkulcmiko wewa wcla A awit ; oma
but lio was known by her his wife ho thot it is he ; this

maka ko ittuu, '* Ncla o ka ko kitahollt
ond ho said to her, ** I it is I who was carried off by him

Mistnsow."
Uie iioo."

Theao thrco papers Hliould bo carefully read and
examined, special attention being paid to tbo par-
ticular order of the Croe words. They will illiu»-
trato the idiom of the langua^, and prove Benrioe-
abie, I truBt, to tho leaxner. \Vith these I bring the
Gfmramar to its c\o«e, wv^Vqv^\^.^'^\#!^V^^V
to All who luaT vriE\i to \«c»xaft wsja^wiNf^^^s^^

238

IMUSINT..

haN umncroiis poiufB of intcrcHt and beauty in iU
cont^tniction woll worthy of iuvostij^^atiou. If tlio
work fiicilituto tlio labour of the MiBsionary, givo
pleasure to the philologist, and aMsint the trader or
rcKidcnt ainongBt the Indiana, I sliall feel that the
time 8i>oiit in its coni]>ilation luis been woU employed
and my efforts sniRciently rewarded.

^^'"TtCU MV HILLIAM CLOVMS I^H» !«»». \A>4Vt«>»

•J*^

k